JP7459903B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, in slot machines, when medals have been bet as gaming media and the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is conducted and the reels begin to spin. If the stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop in response to the results of the internal lottery, a bonus according to the result is awarded (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the gaming machines mentioned above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

The present invention relates to
A means for updating specific information when a game is executed in a predetermined specific state;
A means for granting a privilege to a player when the specific information becomes a predetermined special information;
a means for executing a process of determining whether to end the specific state and transition to a predetermined state in a game executed in the specific state;
Equipped with
When a game result of a game executed in the specific state becomes a special result that enables a transition to a predetermined special state, the specific information can be updated in the game up to the transition to the special state , while the determination process is not executed;
A means for executing a specific notification corresponding to the specific information is provided,
The game result of the game executed in the specific state becomes the special result, and the specific notification is executable in a game in which the determination process is not executed,
A means for transitioning to the special state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied;
means for terminating the special state when a predetermined termination condition is met;
Equipped with
The present invention is characterized in that, after the transition condition is satisfied, the determination process is not executed in the game before the end condition is satisfied .

The present invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door closed. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. It is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of each reel. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between symbols and effective lines that can be visually recognized from a display window. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between symbols and effective lines that can be visually recognized from a display window. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device; 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main controller. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery process. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal game state. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel control process. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch and the winning mode that is established. It is an explanatory view for explaining stop control of a reel. 3 is a flowchart showing RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the third RT state. 13 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB/RB states. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship between states. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of a display mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery result handling process. 13 is a flowchart showing the first specific role processing. It is a flowchart showing the second specific combination processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an add-on notification process. 13 is a flowchart showing the third specific role processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing for specialized zones. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the main results of a lottery regarding the instruction function and the difference in setting of winning probability. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a mode selection table for transitioning between display modes. FIG. 13 shows an example of a premonition game number table. It is a figure showing an example of an additional game number lottery table. A figure showing an example of an add-on lottery table. This is a diagram to explain the relationship between the actual number of remaining games in the advantageous zone and the displayed number of remaining games. It is a figure which shows an example of a later pick-up lottery table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an additional notification timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode transition notification. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of a press order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section. It is a flowchart which shows push order processing. It is a flowchart showing winning result corresponding processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a game number management process. 13 is a flowchart showing an end determination process. It is a figure for explaining the outline of an instruction monitor and a section indicator. 13 is a flowchart showing a first section display process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. 12 is a flowchart showing remaining game number management processing. A diagram to explain the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous zone and the display of the zone indicator. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process by the display control apparatus of the sub side. It is a flowchart showing the effect setting process at the time of bet. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for notifying the order of pressing. A flowchart showing the setting process for the added effects. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects at the time of each stop operation. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of a full stop. It is a flowchart which shows the production setting process during a bonus. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for notifying the transition trigger role. It is a flowchart which shows continuous production setting processing. It is a diagram showing the relationship between notification timing and additional effects. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of continuous production. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for a CZ mode. 13 is a flowchart showing an AT mode lottery process. It is a figure for explaining the outline of bonus and CZ. 11 is a timing chart for explaining a CZ mode. 13 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between CZ mode and bonus. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for a bonus winning notification effect. 13 is a flowchart showing a special notification process. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. 13 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between CZ mode and bonus. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a process for setting a bonus winning notification effect in Modification 1. FIG. A diagram for explaining an overview of a bonus in variant example 2. A figure showing a part of a lottery table for each RB state in Modification Example 3. 12 is a flowchart showing RB production processing in Modification 4. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. In Modification 5, (a) is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for RB state, and (b) is a timing chart showing the relationship between winning results and the number of games in RB. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an overview of a bonus in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the bonus winning notification effect. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for a CZ mode. It is a flowchart which shows AT mode lottery processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the timing at which AT winning notification is performed. It is a timing chart for explaining the timing at which AT winning notification is performed. This is a timing chart to explain the timing when an AT winning notification is made. 11 is a timing chart for explaining the timing at which a CZ mode end notification is made. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning result response process for a winning game in a modified example. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a bonus. It is a flow chart which shows AT mode lottery processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a fall lottery table and an AT lottery table in Modifications 1 and 2. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a map table for CZ mode in Modification 3. FIG.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention applied to a reel-type gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine, and specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is the front side. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the door 12 and a front view of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 is formed into a box shape with an open front as a whole, and is attached to so-called island equipment by nailing or the like when installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a, 14b at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a, 13b. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 is supported rotatably around an opening and closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a, 13b with respect to the housing 11, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. The front door 12 is locked and cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on its back side. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game status. Three vertically elongated display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into two parts, an upper part and a lower part, by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 is provided with a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical (annular) shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is supported so that it can rotate with its central axis being the axis of rotation of the reel. The axes of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one to each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly explained.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be rotated individually, i.e., independently, by driving each stepping motor. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving a drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse) of, for example, 504 pulses, and this excitation pulse controls the rotational position of the stepping motor, i.e., the rotational position of the reel. In addition, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the reel unit 31. When the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, it outputs a detection signal to the main control device 101 described later. Therefore, the main control device 101 can check and correct the angular position of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input.

A plurality of symbols serving as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch one symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses. In addition, the main controller 101 can grasp the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Control can be performed such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be explained.

FIG. 6 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, numbers 0 to 20 are assigned corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are symbols that can be visually recognized by the main controller 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. This is a number for recognition, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, in the following explanation, the numbers will be used.

There are 11 types of symbols: "Red Bell" symbol (e.g., the 7th symbol on the left reel 32L), "White Bell" symbol (e.g., the 20th symbol on the left reel 32L), "First Replay" symbol (e.g., the 19th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Second Replay" symbol (e.g., the 6th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (e.g., the 10th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (e.g., the 8th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., the 4th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Black BAR" symbol (e.g., the 18th symbol on the left reel 32L), "White BAR" symbol (e.g., the 17th symbol on the left reel 32L), "LUCKY" symbol (e.g., the 5th symbol on the left reel 32L), and "Youth" symbol (e.g., the 0th symbol on the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement of the various symbols are completely different on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is formed so that out of 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel, only 3 symbols can be visually recognized in their entirety. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game results of each game are announced using a total of three combinations of symbols, one symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the symbols that can be seen. As described above, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible, and as combinations of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, there are combinations of symbols that stop on the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, combinations of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and combinations of symbols that stop on the lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a line L4 that slopes downward to the right, connecting the top symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the bottom symbols on the right reel 32R, and combinations of symbols that stop on a line L5 that slopes upward to the right, connecting the bottom symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the top symbols on the right reel 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a curved line L6, connecting the top symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols on the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the symbols are lined up, and the curved line L6 is a line that bends when the symbols are lined up. There are other combinations of symbols that stop on lines that bend, other than the curved line L6, but we will not explain them here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, some are activated and some are not, depending on the number of medals bet. When symbols stop in a specified combination on an activated line, i.e., an activated line, a win is achieved and a bonus is awarded in which a specified number of medals, which serve as gaming media, are paid out, or a bonus is awarded in which the gaming state is changed. On the other hand, when symbols stop in a specified combination on an inactivated line, a win is not achieved and the bonus is not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 8(a), only the downward-sloping line L4 is the active line, and as shown in FIG. 8(b), two lines, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4, There are cases where the combination line is an effective line, and cases where only the bending line L6 is an effective line as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when the game is started with 3 medals bet, only the lower right line L4 is considered as the valid line, and when the game is started with 2 medals bet, the lower right line L4 is the active line. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are taken as valid lines. Further, when the game is started after one medal is bet, only the bent line L6 is set as the valid line. The three combination lines of the upper line L1, middle line L2, and right-sloping line L5 are not set as valid lines. Below, a game started with three medals bet is called a 3-bet game, a game started with two medals bet is called a 2-bet game, and a game started with one medal bet is called a 2-bet game. Also called a 1-bet game.

FIGS. 9 to 11 are diagrams showing the correspondence between symbol combinations that result in winnings and benefits that are awarded in the event of winning.

The small prize winnings that result in medal payouts include the 1st small prize winning to the 41st small prize winning.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the first small win is achieved. When the first small win is achieved, 9 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

Although the winning symbol combinations for the 2nd small prize winnings to the 26th small prize winnings are different, in a 3-bet game, the winning patterns are when the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white BAR" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "white bell" symbol or "LUCKY" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white BAR" symbol, "youth" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the top line L1, i.e., the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M and 32R stop on the top line L1. For example, if the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on the top row, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops on the middle row, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the bottom row, the eighth small win is achieved. As shown in FIG. 6, the "red bell" symbol is arranged on the middle reel 32M at a position (number 12) adjacent to the "cherry" symbol (number 11) on the upstream side, and the "red bell" symbol is arranged on the right reel 32R at a position (number 20) one symbol away from the "white BAR" symbol (number 18) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the eighth small win is achieved on the right-downward line L4, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop on the upper line L1. If the 2nd to 26th small wins are achieved, 3 medals will be paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals will be paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 27th small win is a win determined by the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, the 27th small win is a “cherry” on the left reel 32L. The 27th small winning combination is established when the symbols stop on the upper or lower row. In this case, the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L must be on the top or stop, that is, the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol must be on the active line. By stopping, the 27th small role prize is established. When the 27th minor winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 28th minor win occurs when the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on the top or bottom row, and the "cherry" symbols stop all together on the downward-right line L4. More specifically, the 28th minor win occurs when the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol, the "white bell" symbol or the "cherry" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops on the right reel 32R. When the 28th minor win occurs, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

In addition, to provide a supplementary explanation of the relationship between the 27th minor role and the 28th minor role, when the "Cherry" symbol or the "2nd Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L stops, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, Although the 27th minor winning combination is achieved, depending on the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the 28th minor winning combination may be achieved instead of the 27th minor winning winning. In other words, although the configuration is such that the winning mode for winning the 27th minor role includes the winning mode for winning the 28th minor role, winning the 27th minor role and winning the 28th minor role are clearly distinguished when determining the winning. will be held.

The 29th minor win occurs when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R all stop on an active line. In other words, if the sloping right line L4 is the active line, the 29th minor win occurs when the "watermelon" symbols all stop sloping right. When the 29th minor win occurs, 5 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 30th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the upper line L1. More specifically, if the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 30th small It will be a prize. When the 30th small winning combination is achieved, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the "Black BAR", "Young Man", "Watermelon" and "First Replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M and the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 31st minor win is achieved. When the 31st minor win is achieved, 9 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

For the 32nd to 35th small prizes, if they are achieved in a 3 bet game, 3 medals will be paid out, and in a 2 bet game, 14 medals will be paid out.

The 36th minor prize occurs when, for example, the player operates the stop switches 42-44 to aim for the "watermelon" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the "watermelon" symbols on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M, or the left reel 32L and right reel 32R, stop on an active line, while the "watermelon" symbols on the remaining reels do not stop on an active line, resulting in a so-called "watermelon tenpai miss" winning outcome. When the 36th minor prize occurs, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, and "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol, "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. If the "Bell" symbol and the "Youth" symbol stop on the active line, the 37th small role will be won. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, a "second replay" symbol is arranged at a position adjacent to the "red bell" symbol (number 7) on the downstream side (number 6), and the main "white ``Bell'' symbols (No. 3, 12, 15, 20) and downstream adjacent positions (No. 2, 11, 14, 19) are arranged with ``First Replay'' symbols. On the right reel 32R, the main "Red Bell" symbols (No. 2, 5, 12, 20) and the "1 A "replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol is arranged, and a "first replay" symbol is arranged at a position (number 11) adjacent to the "white bell" symbol (number 10) on the upstream side. For this reason, when the 37th small prize is established on the downward-sloping line L4, the "Bell" symbol and the "Replay" symbol are at full strength mainly on the left reel 32L and right reel 32R, while the middle reel 32M is The "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol do not stop, resulting in a so-called double tenpai failure. When the 37th small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the "White BAR", "Young Man", "Watermelon" and "First Replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "First Replay", "Watermelon" and "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 38th small win is achieved. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch when the No. 4 "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the top to bottom row, the 38th small win is achieved, and the "Red Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on the middle line L2. If the 38th minor win is achieved, 3 medals will be paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals will be paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 39th small win is achieved. The 39th small win is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 39th small win is achieved, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, This is the 40th small role prize. The 40th small winning combination is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 40th small winning combination is achieved, nine medals are paid out.

If the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol or "Cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 41st small It will be a prize. When the 41st small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

Prizes for which a replay benefit that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals include the 1st replay win to the 12th replay win. Furthermore, if the second re-game winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state, and if the third re-gaming winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-gaming win is achieved. If a winning or a fifth re-game winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state.

State transition winnings that only result in a transition of the game state include the 1st BB winning, the 2nd BB winning, the RB winning, and the CB winning.

If the "Red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, it will be the 1st BB prize, and if the "White BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line He won the 2nd BB prize. When these BB wins are established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Also, if the "Black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, an RB prize will be awarded. . When the RB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the RB state. Then, the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, the "Watermelon" symbol, the "1st Replay" symbol, and the "Black BAR" on the right reel 32R. When the symbol and stops on the active line, it becomes a CB win. If a CB win is established, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although not a winning combination, there are some winning combinations that cause the game state to transition to the first RT state. Specifically, when the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white BAR" symbol, "LUCKY" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "white bell" symbol, and "cherry" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol and "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the game state transitions to the first RT state. Also, when the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "white BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the game state transitions to the first RT state. In the following, the combinations of the above symbols are referred to as transition results.

At the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 is provided which is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, that is, start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are connected to the main control device 101, which will be described later. The main control device 101 then determines that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a output a detection signal of a LOW signal, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the detection signal switches from a LOW signal to a HIGH signal. The main control device 101 determines that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated by determining this signal switch. When the main control device 101 determines that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, it controls the reel corresponding to the operated switch to stop spinning.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the left reel 32L stops spinning, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the middle reel 32M stops spinning, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the right reel 32R stops spinning. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means that is operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal slot 45 involves an operation in which the player directly inserts medals, it can be said that the medal slot 45 constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

The medals inserted through the medal slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back side of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the ejection passage 48 side. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided from a medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 to a medal receiving tray 50 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out the medals to the player. The dispensing device 53 discharges the medals into an opening 48a provided in the discharging passage 48 by rotating a medal dispensing rotating plate (not shown), and dispensing the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 via the discharging passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a reserve tank 54 is provided to avoid storing more than a predetermined amount of medals in the storage tank 52. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals are stored at a level higher than the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion port 45. If the return switch 55 is operated when a medal inserted into the medal insertion port 45 is stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically linked and operated, and the medal stuck in the selector 46 is returned from the medal ejection port 49.

At the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, a first credit input switch 56 is provided for inputting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time. Further, a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit input switch 56, and a third credit input switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56. The second credit input switch 57 is for inputting one virtual medal, and the third credit input switch 58 is for inputting two virtual medals at a time. Each of the credit input switches 56 to 58 constitutes an input means for inputting game media together with the medal input slot 45. Also, it should be noted that whereas the medal slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, the credit input switches 56 to 58 only involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media.

Between the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57, there is provided an effect switch 66 that is operated when an effect occurs. In other words, to the left of the effect switch 66, there are the first credit input switch 56 and the third credit input switch 58, and to the right of the effect switch 66, there is the second credit input switch 57.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores surplus input medals and paid-out medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the payment switch 59 is operated under the condition that the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 49 as real medals. In this case, if we focus on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display section 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, a remaining payout number display section 61 that displays the number of medals remaining to be paid out until the BB state ends, and a payout number display section 62 that displays the number of medals paid out when a win occurs. These display sections 60 to 62 are made up of seven-segment displays, but can of course be replaced with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25, and to the right of the payout number display section 62, there is a push order display that indicates the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and a push order display that indicates the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. An instruction monitor 68 is provided with a section indicator for indicating an advantageous section, which is a section in which the winning rate of the small winning combination is changed by the above, and the game can be played in an advantageous situation for the player. The instruction monitor 68 will be explained in detail later.

At the top of the front door 12, there are provided an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, a pair of left and right speakers 64 that play various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game status, and an auxiliary display unit 65 that gives the player various information. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and since the game using each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be performed by the main display unit, it is referred to as the auxiliary display unit 65 in this embodiment. At the back of the auxiliary display unit 65, there is provided a display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65.

Inside the housing 11, a power supply box 70 is provided to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside and is equipped with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is an activation switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. The setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hall manager or the like to adjust the medal output. In other words, the hall manager or the like can insert the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turn it ON to set the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting an error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls the game is attached to the cabinet 11.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 102 which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main control device 101, there are the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects when each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45, a payout detection sensor 51a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51, a first credit insertion detection sensor 52a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a second credit insertion detection sensor 53a that detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. 6a, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, a third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the third credit insertion switch 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON, and other sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104.

The power supply unit 91 is connected to the input side of the main control unit 101 via the input/output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to the main control unit 101 and each electronic device of the slot machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the state of power interruption and generates a power failure signal not only in the event of a power outage but also in the event of power interruption by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage, which in this example is 12 volts DC, output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to, for example, less than 10 volts. It is configured so that a power outage signal is output. The power outage signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 executes power outage processing to be described later by recognizing this power outage signal. Further, this power outage signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts to be used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control unit 101, even if the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to allow the main control unit 101 to perform power outage processing.

On the output side of the main control device 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, a credit card A display section 60, a remaining payout number display section 61, a payout number display section 62, an instruction monitor 68, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are connected via the input/output port 104. connected.

The CPU 102 described above includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106, which is not shown, as is well known, there are various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits. Various counters are built-in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as a storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the power to the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing lottery results of winning combinations, and stop information used to control the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to a stop information storage area 106b for storing game conditions such as a BB state, a state information storage area 106c for storing game states such as BB state, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power interruption (including power interruption by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below) in the event that power is interrupted due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage is resolved (including power on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before power was interrupted based on the information in the backup area. Writing to the backup area is performed when power is interrupted by the power outage processing (see Figure 14), and the restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed during main processing when power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. When the power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing as power outage flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181, which is a calculation processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181, and a RAM 183 for securing a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), with the main control device 101 connected to the input side and the upper lamps 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 connected to the output side. The display control device 81 drives and controls the upper lamps 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 based on various commands input from the main control device 101. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that performs auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that manages the overall game. In other words, by providing a sub-board for sounds, lamps, and displays indirectly related to the game, the burden on the main board is reduced.

A production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) is connected to the input side of the display control device 81. Note that the various display sections 60 to 62 and 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Next, the control processes executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processes of the CPU 102 can be broadly divided into main processes that are started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processes that are started periodically (every 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processes that are started when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. Below, we will explain the processes related to the progress of the game among these processes, i.e., timer interrupt processes, and normal processes performed in the main processes.

Figure 14 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main control unit 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control unit 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 that are used in normal processing, which will be described later, are saved to a backup area in the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here, an outline of the power outage process will be explained.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power failure signal is input, the main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power outage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is ended, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing, and the command transmission is completed. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. Thereafter, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, by calculating a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not when the power outage is resolved and storing it in a backup area, subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In addition, considering the case where the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, for example, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not output, it means that the power outage has been recovered, so writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power outage signal continues to be output, an infinite loop will continue. Incidentally, even under an infinite loop, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, the process moves to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are performed.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clearing process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S105, interrupt end declaration processing is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motor, which is the respective drum drive motor. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read results are normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor the In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to send various commands, such as a lottery result command, to the display control device 81. In step S111, a segment data setting process is performed to set the segment data to be displayed in the credit display unit 60, the remaining number of coins to be paid display unit 61, and the number of coins to be paid display unit 62. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting process to each display unit 60 to 62, 68 and display the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. In step S113, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 are restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the normal processing for performing main control related to the game will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 15.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step S202, a pre-start process is performed to enable play. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 and the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like finishes, the game management process shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game, etc.) are cleared. Thereafter, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any re-game winnings were achieved in the previous game. If any re-game winning is established, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically input virtual medals of the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, for example, if a replay winning is achieved in a 3 bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and if a replay winning is achieved in a 1 bet game, one virtual medal is automatically inserted. Performs processing to automatically insert virtual medals.

In addition, in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without subtracting the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60. In other words, if any re-game winning is achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals he owns and without inserting medals. If any re-gaming winnings have not been established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether any abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process, If an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated or not, and when the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process that pays out the same number of virtual medals as the credited virtual medals. I do.

After the end of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, it is determined whether medals were inserted or credit input switches 56 to 58 were operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one of them is performed, a medal insertion process is performed to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process is ended. Furthermore, if neither medals nor credit input switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether the number of medals bet has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, the specified number in the CB state is set to "2", and the specified numbers in the game states other than the CB state (specifically, the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the BB state, and the RB state) are set to "1" and "3". In other words, in the CB state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals is "2", and in the game states other than the CB state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals is "1" or "3". In other words, in the game states other than the CB state, if medals have not been bet, or if medals have been bet but the number of medals is "2", a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of medals has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, the mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. Such mode transition notification process will be described in detail later.

After performing the process in step S206, a bet command including information on the process result in step S206 and information on the number of bets for which an affirmative determination was made in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device. Set as the output target. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be described in detail later.

After executing the process in step S207, it is determined in step S208 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, the configuration is such that the game can be started if the start lever 41 is operated under a situation where a specified number of medals have been bet. It means that a command has been issued. In such a case, in step S209, a valid line setting process is performed in which the combination line corresponding to the bet number is set as the valid line. That is, in a 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as an active line, and in a 2-bet game, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as active lines. Furthermore, in a 1-bet game, the bending line L6 is set as the valid line. In step S210, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a de-energized state to prohibit bet acceptance. Thereafter, the lottery process in step S211, the reel control process in step S212, the medal payout process in step S213, the RT status process in step S214, and the bonus status process in step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 16.

In step S301, a random number to be used when determining the validity of a winning combination is acquired. This slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. With this configuration, it becomes possible to obtain a random number promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it becomes possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table is selected for determining the validity of the winning combination. This slot machine 10 has seven types of gaming states: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, an RB state, and a CB state. are set for each gaming state. Note that in this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the BB state and the RB state.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is selected. . For example, if the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, the current gaming state is determined to be the normal gaming state, and the lottery table for the normal gaming state is set. select. In addition, in this slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance, and when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set which winning probability is based on which internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the process related to setting the probability of winning.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process that is started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is started after the initialization process when the power is turned on in a state where the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned ON. In the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by one for each operation of the start lever 41 as a predetermined operation, and for example, the setting value is updated so that "setting 1" → "setting 2" → "setting 3" → "setting 4" → "setting 5" → "setting 6" → "setting 1" every time the start lever 41 is operated once. Note that each setting value is displayed, for example, on the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated each time the setting value is updated. Then, based on the setting key detection sensor 73a being turned OFF, the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 is also terminated. The setting value set in the winning probability setting process is stored in RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a lottery table selection process is performed based on the stored setting value.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. Figure 17 is a lottery table for the normal game mode selected in the normal game mode of "Setting 3". The lottery table has index values IV set, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and has a point value PV set.

After selecting the lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, the determination value DV used for determining the validity of the winning combination is set. In this judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current judgment value DV. In the first judgment value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV, 1, and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value, and a new value is set. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is valid or not. In determining the validity of the combination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If the number exceeds 65535, it is determined in step S306 whether or not one of the first BB, second BB, RB, and CB has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an affirmative determination was made in step S305 for the index value IV (IV=32 to 62) including any one of the first BB, second BB, RB, and CB. If an affirmative determination is made in step S306, processing is performed to set the corresponding bonus winning flags (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, RB winning flag, CB winning flag) in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S307. I do. If a negative determination is made in step S306, or after the process in step S307 is performed, in step S308, the winning flag of each minor role corresponding to the index value IV that was affirmatively determined in step S305 is stored in the winning flag storage area. 106a. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=32, the 1st BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th minor winning flag, the 33rd minor winning flag, and the 33rd minor winning flag are set in step S308. 35 Set the small winning winning flag. Further, when the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=15, a winning flag indicating that the 30th minor prize and the 41st minor prize have been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

By the way, the set winning flags are a winning flag (1st BB winning flag) indicating that the 1st BB has been won, a winning flag (2nd BB winning flag) indicating that the 2nd BB has been won, and a winning flag indicating that the RB has been won. If it is not one of the flags (RB winning flag), the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag was set ends (see S203 of the normal process). On the other hand, when the winning flag is one of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, and RB winning flag, these winning flags are reset with one of the conditions being that the corresponding winning has been achieved. That is, the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the RB winning flag may be valid over multiple games.

In addition, in steps S306 to S308 in a state where the 1st BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag, and RB winning flag are carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1st BB, 2nd BB, RB, and CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is carried over. If a winning combination other than the first BB, second BB, RB, and CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=32 while the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, the 1st BB winning flag is not set and the 28th minor winning flag is set. , the 33rd small winning combination winning flag, and the 35th small winning winning flag are set. In addition, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 33 while the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, the 2nd BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th minor winning flag, the 33rd The small winning combination winning flag and the 35th small winning winning flag are set. Then, in a state where the RB winning flag is carried over, for example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 51, the RB winning flag is not set, and the 27th minor winning flag and the 33rd minor winning flag are set. Set the winning flag.

In addition, a separate lottery table is prepared in which any of the 1st BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag, and RB winning flag is carried over, and any of the 1st BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag, and RB winning flag is being carried over. In this state, the lottery process may be performed using the separately prepared lottery table. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV value may be set so as not to win the first BB, second BB, RB, and CB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV has failed. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S309, and in the subsequent step S310, it is determined whether there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the validity of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV used to judge the validity of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, the winning combination is determined based on the determination value DV. By the way, when determining the validity of the winning combination using the lottery table shown in Figure 17, the probability of winning in the normal replay (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/7.3, which is the probability of winning in the strong cherry. The probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 13) is approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 14) is approximately 1/183. be. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 15) is approximately 1 in 300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 16) is approximately 1 in 300. 1. The probability of winning chance A (probability of winning when IV = 17) is approximately 1/252, and the probability of winning chance B (probability of winning when IV = 18) is approximately 252. It is 1/1. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 19) is approximately 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning the no question bell (probability of winning when IV = 20) is approximately 1 in 65,500. It is 1. The probability of winning the sequential push bell 1, the sequential push bell 2, the pinch push bell 1, and the pinch push bell 2 (the probability of winning when IV = 21 to 24) is approximately 1/43.7, respectively, and the middle push bell 1. The probability of winning the middle push bell 2, right push bell 1, and right push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=25 to 28) is about 1/21.8. The probability of winning Strong Cherry Duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is approximately 1/21800, and the probability of winning Strong Cherry Duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is approximately 1/21800. Approximately 1 in 21,800, the probability of winning weak cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is approximately 1 in 32,800, the probability of winning weak cherry duplication 2 (when IV = 35) The probability of winning is approximately 1/32,800. The probability of winning strong watermelon stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is approximately 1/32800, and the probability of winning strong watermelon stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37) is approximately 1/32800. It is approximately 1/32,800. The probability of winning weak watermelon stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is approximately 1/65500, and the probability of winning weak watermelon stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is approximately 1/65500. It is approximately 1/65,500. The probability of winning in Chance A overlap 1, Chance A overlap 2, Chance B overlap 1, and Chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=40 to 43) is approximately 1/32,800. The probability of winning middle bell duplication 1 and middle bell duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV=44, 45) is about 1/21800, respectively. The probability of winning the special reply A duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 46) is approximately 1/1010, and the probability of winning the special reply A duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 47) ) is approximately 1/1310. The probability of winning the special reply AB duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is approximately 1/1010, and the probability of winning the special reply AB duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 49) ) is approximately 1/1310. The probability of winning strong cherry stack 3 (probability of winning when IV = 50) is approximately 1/21800, and the probability of winning weak cherry stack 3 (probability of winning when IV = 51) is approximately 1/21800. It is approximately 1/32,800. The probability of winning the strong watermelon stack 3 and the weak watermelon stack 3 (probability of winning when IV = 52, 53) is about 1/13100, respectively, and the chances of winning the chance A stack 3 and chance B stack 3 are approximately 1/13100. The probability of winning (probability of winning when IV=54, 55) is approximately 1/32,800. The probability of winning the middle bell duplication 3 (probability of winning when IV=56) is approximately 1/13100. The probability of winning for special reply A duplication 3 (probability of winning when IV = 57) is about 1/1010, and the probability of winning for special reply AB duplication 3 (probability of winning when IV = 58) is about 1/1010. The probability that this happens is approximately 1/1310. The probability of winning individually for the 1st BB, 2nd BB, and RB (probability of winning when IV=59 to 61) is about 1/65,500 each. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV=62) is approximately 1/19.9. Furthermore, the probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/1.96.

Note that in the normal game state lottery table, 0 is set for the point values PV of IV=2 to 12, 29 to 31, and 63. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, winnings cannot be won at these index values IV.

After the winning flag is set in step S308, or if it is determined in step S310 that there is no object to be judged, it means that the judgment of the winning combination has ended. In such a case, the process advances to step S311, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In the following step S312, lottery result handling processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for determining whether to shift the gaming state or not depending on the lottery results in steps S301 to S311, processing for notifying the winning combination, etc. are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S312, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the result of the hand win/loss judgment. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no command is sent to the display control device 81. The command is sent to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S314, a stop information setting process is executed to set symbols that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to a winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in steps S306 to S308. For example, when a strong cherry is won (won when IV=13) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, the stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the 28th small combination, the 32nd small combination, the 35th small combination, and the 1st BB winning are allowed to be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, when a strong cherry overlap 1 is won (won when IV=32) and the strong cherry winning flag and the 1st BB winning flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the 28th small combination, the 33rd small combination, the 35th small combination, and the 1st BB winning are allowed to be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the following step S315, if multiple stoppable symbol information was set in step S314, a priority setting process is executed to set the priority order. For example, if multiple roles out of small win, replay, and bonus have been won, the following priority order is set. If a small win and a bonus have been won, the priority order is set so that a small win is given priority, and if a small win cannot be won, a bonus win is won. If a replay and a bonus have been won, the priority order is set so that a replay win is given priority.

For example, if Strong Cherry Duplicate 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th, 33rd, 35th, and 1st BB wins is set, the priority is set so that the 28th, 33rd, and 35th small wins take priority over the 1st BB win. Also, if Special Replay A Duplicate 3 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 9th replay and RB wins is set, the priority is set so that the 9th replay win takes priority over the RB win. And, for example, if a normal replay is won in a situation where the RB win is carried over and the stop symbol information corresponding to the RB win and the 1st replay win is set, the priority is set so that the 1st replay win takes priority over the RB win.

Here, when a re-game is won, a winning combination of symbols is set so that one of the winning re-games will definitely win. In other words, if the player wins in the replay, the replay win will definitely be achieved and there will be no loss of winnings. Therefore, when stop symbol information for re-games and bonuses is set, a re-game win is always achieved in any of the set re-games, and a bonus win is never achieved.

In addition, when multiple small wins or multiple replays overlap and result in a win, which symbol corresponding to the small win or replay will stop on the active line depends on the timing of the stop operation. For example, if a strong watermelon is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 30th and 41st small wins is set, as described above, the target symbol on the left reel 32L is the same as the "watermelon" symbol for the 30th and 41st small wins. Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left reel 32L, it is not determined which small win will be established. On the other hand, the target symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are both "red bell" symbols for the 30th small win, and "cherry" and "black BAR" symbols for the middle reel 32M and "watermelon" symbols for the 41st small win. For example, in a 3-bet game, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated to stop on the middle reel 32M when the 4th "watermelon" symbol to the 7th "red bell" symbol reach the middle row, it is possible to stop both the 7th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor win, and the "black BAR" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor win, in the middle row on the active line. In this case, in this embodiment, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with the least number of slips is stopped first. As a result, in the above case, the stop drive control is performed so that the "red bell" symbol stops in the middle row, the 41st minor win is not achieved, and the 30th minor win is possible.

On the other hand, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated to stop when the 8th "black BAR" symbol to the 12th "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M reach the middle row, it is possible to stop the 8th "black BAR" symbol and the 11th "cherry" symbol, which are the target symbols for the 41st minor win, and the 12th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor win, in the middle row. In this case, the stop symbol information is set to prioritize stopping the symbols with the fewest slips, so the 8th "black BAR" symbol or the 11th "cherry" symbol stops in the middle row, the 30th minor win is not achieved, and the 41st minor win is possible.

The same goes for the right reel 32R, and depending on the timing when the right stop switch 44 is stopped, the "Red Bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor prize, and the "Watermelon" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor prize, are displayed. The stop symbol information is set so that the symbol that has a smaller number of slips than the symbol stops at the lower stage, which is the active line. In addition, on the right reel 32R, if the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed at the timing when the 6th "1st Replay" symbol and the 7th "Black BAR" symbol reach the effective position, "Watermelon" Neither the symbol nor the "red bell" symbol can be stopped, and in this case, no small winning combination is achieved and the player is left out.

After executing the process of step S315, the section display first process is executed in step S316, and then the lottery process is ended. The first section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this process will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S212 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 18.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a spin effect process is performed. The spin effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during an invalid period, based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. In the following step S402, a spin start process is performed to start the spinning of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game, and if it has not elapsed, the wait time has elapsed. Wait until If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and motor control initialization processing is performed to set rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106. By performing such processing, acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the process waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a predetermined rotational speed, and the rotation start process ends. Furthermore, when the rotational speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42 to 44. Notify players, etc.

Following the spin start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the process waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, where it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether a stop command has been generated. If a stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403, where it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. If a stop command has been generated, a stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the display control device 81 to know which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop command. If a stop command command has been set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stopping mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, there is a corresponding stopping mode in which when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stopping mode in which the reels are stopped after sliding one symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding two symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are available. Therefore, in step S407, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Thereafter, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol. If they are equal, reel stop processing to stop the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

The second stop information setting process is a process for changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that has been set and the stop results of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, for example, when a win occurs when IV=21 to 28, that is, when a win occurs on forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, center push bell 1, center push bell 2, right push bell 1, and right push bell 2 (hereinafter, these are also collectively referred to as "push order bells") (see FIG. 17), the second stop information setting process is performed to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning form that is achieved. For example, when the center push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the second, seventh, or ninth small role win is achieved when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the stop information is set so that the first small role win is achieved when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, and the stop information is set so that the second, seventh, or ninth small role win is achieved when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding win may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly explained. In this slot machine 10, in a gaming state other than the CB state (3-bet game), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding up to 4 symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. , only the right-sloping line L4 is set as a valid line. Therefore, if the same type of symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol will be activated when it becomes a winning symbol regardless of the timing of operating the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, with regard to the symbols arranged so as to form sections separated by five or more symbols, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in order to stop the symbols on the active line.

An example will be explained in which the middle press bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → middle stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 are operated in the order. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in order to achieve the second minor prize winning, the seventh minor prize winning, or the ninth minor prize winning.

The second small win symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol. The "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also function as the seventh small win symbol and the ninth small win symbol. The second small win symbols (the seventh small win symbols and the ninth small win symbols) are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the interval between them is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol stops on the upper row regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "cherry" symbol number 4 on the left reel 32L has reached the middle row, the "red bell" symbol number 7 stops on the upper row as shown in FIG. 20(a). As a result, there is still room for the second small win, the seventh small win, or the ninth small win to be established on the right-downward line L4.

The second small role symbol on the middle reel 32M is a “white BAR” symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "white BAR" symbol is placed only at the 18th position. Furthermore, the seventh small role symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "Red 7" symbol is placed only at the 14th position. The 9th small winning symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "cherry" symbol is placed only at the 11th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second small role symbol, the seventh minor role symbol, or the ninth minor role symbol may stop on the active line, or the second minor role symbol, the seventh minor role symbol, or the ninth minor role symbol may stop on the active line. None of the 9th small winning symbols may stop on the active line.

Specifically, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any one of the "First Replay" symbols (No. 13) to the "First Replay" symbols (No. 17) has reached the bottom row, the "White BAR" symbol, which is the second small win symbol, stops in the middle row. As a result, there is room for the second small win symbol to be established on the right-downward line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any one of the "Second Replay" symbols (No. 9) to the "First Replay" symbols (No. 13) has reached the bottom row, the "Red 7" symbol, which is the seventh small win symbol, stops in the middle row, as shown in FIG. 20(b). As a result, there is room for the seventh small win symbol to be established on the right-downward line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any one of the "White Bell" symbols (No. 6) to the "Youth" symbols (No. 10) has reached the bottom row, the "Cherry" symbol, which is the ninth small win symbol, stops in the middle row. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at any other time, the second, seventh, and ninth minor win symbols cannot be stopped in the middle row even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after sliding four symbols. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such a time, the number 2 "LUCKY" symbol or the number 6 "white bell" symbol will stop in the middle row.

When the 7th small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the 7th small role winning can be realized.

The 7th small role symbol on the right reel 32R is a “white bell” symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white bell" symbol is placed only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh small winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the "1st Replay" symbol No. 6 to the "White Bell" symbol No. 10 has reached the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 20(c). As shown in , the "white bell" symbol, which is the 7th small role symbol, stops at the lower row. As a result, the 7th small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. For example, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the No. 3 "Second Replay" symbol has reached the bottom row, the No. 4 "Watermelon" symbol will be displayed as shown in FIG. 20(d). Stop at the bottom. The combination of the "red bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. 11.

When the 9th small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the 9th small role winning can be realized.

The 9th minor symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "Youth" symbol is located at the 15th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the 9th minor symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when any of the "First Replay" symbol (11th) to the "Youth" symbol (15th) has reached the bottom row, the "Youth" symbol, which is the 9th minor symbol, stops at the bottom row. As a result, the 9th minor symbol wins on the right downward line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "Watermelon" symbol or the "First Replay" symbol stops at the bottom row. The combination of the "White Bell" symbol ("Red Bell" symbol), the "Cherry" symbol, and the "Watermelon" symbol ("First Replay" symbol) from the left is a transition result as shown in FIG. 11.

When the second small win symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the second small win can be achieved.

The second small role symbol on the right reel 32R is the “white BAR” symbol. On the right reel 32R, a "white BAR" symbol is placed at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second small winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 14th "Watermelon" symbol to the 18th "White BAR" symbol reaches the lower stage, the second small role symbol " The "White BAR" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the second small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "white BAR" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. 11.

If the second, seventh and ninth minor win symbols on the middle reel 32M do not stop in the middle row, i.e. if the "LUCKY" or "white bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M stop in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the "watermelon" or "first replay" symbol stops in the lower row.

The "watermelon" and "first replay" symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R so that the distance between each of the "watermelon" and "first replay" symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" or "first replay" symbol stops on the lower row regardless of the timing of the operation. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "LUCKY" symbol ("white bell" symbol), and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition result as shown in FIG. 11.

In this way, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → middle stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 is operated in the order, the second minor prize winning will be established, and the seventh minor prize will be won. There are three cases: a winning is achieved, a ninth minor role winning is successful, and a transitional number is stopped.

Next, we will explain an example in which the center push bell 1 is won and the center stop switch 43, left stop switch 42, and right stop switch 44 are operated in that order. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the first small win.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor winning symbol, are arranged so that the distance between each "red bell" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" symbols will stop in the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols, which are first minor prize symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the first minor prize symbols is four or less symbols. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the second time, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped on the upper row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, the first minor winning symbols, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, are arranged so that the distance between each first minor winning symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol will stop on the bottom row regardless of the timing of the operation.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 is operated in the order, the first small winning combination is achieved regardless of the timing of the operation.

If the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operation orders, the first small role prize will be established regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, depending on the timing of the operation, a small winning combination will be established, or the transition number will stop on the active line. By the way, if you win the middle bell, you will win the 38th small role regardless of the operation order and timing, and if you win the no-questions-asked bell, you will win the 38th small role regardless of the operation order and operation timing. 1 small win prize is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process for setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the winning combination is lined up on an active line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on an active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the symbols stopped on the lower row of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning combination is established on the active line. If a winning combination is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. If the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the payout number corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an error occurrence process is performed to notify the user of the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, a winning result response process is performed in step S414. In the winning result response process, a process for shifting the game state based on the winning result is performed. The winning result response process will be described in detail later.

After performing the winning result corresponding process, a second section display process is executed in step S415. The second section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this process will be described in detail later. Thereafter, in step S416, a winning result command is set to cause the display control device 81 to grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is ended.

Next, we will provide an overview of the medal payout process in step S213.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether the payout number set in the payout information storage area is 0. If the payout number is 0, it means that the previous payout determination process determined that no small winning combination was achieved. In such a case, it is determined whether any of the first replay winning combination to the eighth replay winning combination was achieved, based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the replay winning combinations was achieved, the medal payout process is terminated as is, and if any of the replay winning combinations was achieved, a replay setting process is performed to set the game state to a replay state, and the medal payout process is terminated. Note that in the start waiting process (step S204) described above, if it is determined that the current game state is a replay state, an automatic insertion process is performed.

On the other hand, if the payout number set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the system pays out medals in the same number as the payout number, and ends the medal payout process. Specifically, when the credit counter count value has not reached the upper limit (the number of medals stored is 50), the system adds the payout number to the credit counter count value, and displays the added value on the credit display unit 60. When the credit counter count value has reached the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the payout number, the system drives the medal payout rotating plate, and pays out medals from the hopper device 51 to the medal tray 50 via the medal discharge port 49. In addition, the medal payout process also performs a process of changing the payout number displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the payout of medals. In addition, when the current game state is BB state, the system subtracts the payout number from the value of the remaining payout number counter described later, and subtracts the remaining payout number displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61.

Next, the RT state processing in step S214 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 21.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition number has stopped on the active line. If the transition number has stopped, the process advances to step S502, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, a first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. After that, this process ends. If it is determined in step S501 that the transition roll has not stopped on the active line, the process advances to step S504, and the second re-game winning is determined based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine whether it is established. If the second re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. After that, this process ends. In addition, if the rolled number stops moving on the active line under a gaming state other than the normal gaming state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the process returns to step S503. Then, the first RT setting flag is set, and this process ends.

If the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

Figure 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of "setting 3". When compared to the lottery table for the normal game state (see Figure 17), the lottery table for the first RT state has different point values PV for IV = 1 to 5, and the same point values PV are set for the other index values IV. For this reason, when using this lottery table to determine whether a combination is a win or lose, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 63 is equal to the respective winning probabilities in the normal game state, the probability of winning when IV = 1 is approximately 1 in 67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 1 in 32.8. The probability of not winning any combination is approximately 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22, if you win when IV=1, it will be a normal replay win, and if you win when IV=2, it will be a first promotion replay 1 win, and IV If you win when IV = 3, you will win 1st promotion replay 2, if you win when IV = 4, you will win 1st promotion replay 3, and if you win when IV = 5, you will win 1st promotion replay 3. In this case, you will win the 1st promotion replay 4. The probability of winning when IV=1 to 5 is approximately 1/7.30. The normal replay winning probability under normal gaming conditions is also approximately 1/7.30. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the first RT state, each role type of small role, replay, and bonus will be won with the same probability as in the normal gaming state, and the winning mode will be such that the replay benefit is granted. changes to something different from the normal gaming state. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, only the first re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state is realized, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-gaming winning, the third re-gaming prize that shifts to the second RT state is realized. To establish.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated not only when the above-mentioned push order bell is won but also when the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won. Stop information is set in order to change the winning mode achieved depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44.

FIG. 23(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. If you win the first promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, unlike the case where you win the push order bell, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay prize or The third re-game winning is guaranteed. For 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, the 3rd replay is associated with one of the 6 operation orders, and the 1st replay is associated with the other operation orders. It is attached.

In addition, in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, seventh replay, and eighth replay are also allocated as winning roles. However, these sixth replay to eighth replay are not associated with any of the six operation sequences described above. Therefore, even if the sixth replay to eighth replay are winning in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, they will not win regardless of the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44.

More specifically, for the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is assigned the first replay and the third replay, the first promotion replay 2 is assigned the sixth replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the first promotion replay 3 is assigned the seventh replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 4 is assigned the eighth replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay. However, for any of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replay is either the first replay or the third replay. This is to make it difficult to understand the operation sequence that results in the third replay winning. That is, for example, if there is only one type of first promotion replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning will also be only one type, and it may be possible to intentionally achieve the third replay winning when the first promotion replay is won. This relationship is not limited to the relationship between the first promotion replays 1 to 4, but can also be said for other overlapping roles.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S504 that the second replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S506, and based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third re-game winning is established. If the third replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and the process ends. do.

If the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the second RT state lottery table is selected. do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of “Setting 3”. When compared with the first RT state lottery table (see FIG. 22), the second RT state lottery table has different point values PV for IV=1 to 10, and the same point values PV for other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when determining the validity of a winning combination using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV=11 to 63 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and the probability of winning when IV=1 The probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 1/13.2, and the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is approximately 1/15.5 and IV = 9. , 10, the probability of winning is approximately 1/8.90. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/150. That is, when moving to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal gaming state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first replay win that does not shift the gaming state, the second replay win that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth replay win that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth replay win that shifts to the third RT state. A prize is won.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), in addition to the above-mentioned cases where the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command, even when the fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, and second promotion replay 2 are won.

Figure 23(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning patterns that are achieved. If Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3 are won, the first replay win or the second replay win will always be achieved, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. If Second Promotion Replay 1 is won, the first replay win, the fourth replay win, or the fifth replay win will always be achieved, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. If Second Promotion Replay 2 is won, the first replay win or the fourth replay win will always be achieved, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

In addition, the number attached to the fourth re-game in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the fourth re-game winning is established. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination that results in a winning combination, and "2" corresponds to a symbol combination that results in a red 7, red 7, and black BAR middle stop (see FIG. 11). For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first when winning the second promotion replay 1, the winning symbol combination will stop and the fourth replay winning will be established, or the red 7 - Red 7/Black BAR The symbol combination that stops in the middle row stops and the 4th re-game winning is established.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S509, and based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-gaming winning has been achieved. If the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511. Then, this process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S509, the RT state processing is immediately terminated.

When the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the third RT state lottery table is selected. do.

Figure 25 is a lottery table for the third RT state selected in the third RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the second RT state (see Figure 24), the point values PV for IV = 9 to 12 in the third RT state are different, and the same point values PV are set for the other index values IV. For this reason, when the lottery table is used to determine whether a winning combination is a winning combination, the probability of winning when IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 63 is equal to the respective winning probabilities in the second RT state, the winning combination is not a winning combination when IV = 9, 10, and the winning combination is about 1 in 7.00 when IV = 11, 12. The probability of losing when none of the combinations are won is about 1 in 150. In other words, when the game state transitions to the third RT state, the winning combinations of small combinations, replays, and bonuses are won with the same probability as in the second RT state, while the winning combination in which the replay privilege is granted changes to one different from that in the second RT state. More specifically, in the third RT state, in addition to the first replay winning event that does not result in a transition to the game state and the second replay winning event that transitions to the first RT state, the sixth replay winning event, the seventh replay winning event, and the eighth replay winning event that does not result in a transition to the game state, and the third replay winning event that transitions to the second RT state are also achieved.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), even if BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won, the stop information is set to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

FIG. 23(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. If you win BAR Replay 1, regardless of the operating timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, you will receive either the 1st replay win, 6th replay win, 7th replay win, or 3rd replay win. is definitely true. If you win BAR Replay 2, regardless of the operating timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, you will receive either the 1st replay win, 6th replay win, 8th replay win, or 3rd replay win. is definitely true.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 26.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S613 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, it is determined in step S602 whether any one of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set. If any of the winning flags is set, the process advances to step S603, and it is determined whether or not a CB winning combination has been achieved based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a CB win is established, a CB setting flag is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in a remaining payout number counter provided in the status information storage area 106c for counting the remaining number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state. By performing the processing of steps S604 to S605, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

Here, CB and CB state will be briefly explained.

The "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol, "1st Replay" symbol, or "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R. If , stops on the active line, it will be a CB win. The CB symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R such that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, if a CB is won, the CB is won regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The main control device 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Then, in step S205 of the normal process, it is determined whether the number of bets on medals has reached "2" instead of "3", and in the effective line setting process (step S209), the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4 are determined. Set as the valid line.

In step S302 of the lottery process, a lottery table for the CB state is selected. Although the illustration of the lottery table for the CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for the CB state, the point value PV for IV=1 to 62 is set to "0", and the point value for IV=63 is set to "65536" (see FIG. 17 for the correspondence between IV and winning roles). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning a CB small/medium role (the probability of winning when IV=63) is 1 in 1, and no loss occurs. Note that a configuration in which some losses occur may also be used. Also, a configuration in which multiple types of CB small/medium roles are provided, and the small roles that win and the number of coins paid out when winning are different may be used.

FIG. 27(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, even if a CB small/medium winning combination is won, some kind of small winning combination will always be achieved regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, if you win the 1st minor role, 27th minor role, 31st minor role, 36th minor role to 38th minor role win, you will receive 15 medals. If a payout is made and the 2nd minor role winning ~ 26th minor role winning, 28th minor role winning ~ 30th minor role winning, 32nd minor role winning ~ 35th minor role winning, 14 pieces Medals are paid out. In other words, when transitioning to the CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

In addition, in place of or in addition to the CB as a winning combination and the CB state as a gaming state, there is a single bonus (SB) that allows you to play one game (JAC game) as a winning combination, and the single bonus winning (winning). ) may be provided.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that a CB win has not been achieved, this means that a bonus win flag other than CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether a 1st BB win or a 2nd BB win has been achieved.

If any of the BB wins is achieved, the BB win flag set in the win flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S611. After that, in step S612, the remaining payout counter is set to 270, and the remaining payout display unit 61 is caused to display 270. The number set in step S612 corresponds to the upper limit payout number in the BB state, and the BB state is ended on the condition that medals paid out in the BB state equal to or more than this number have been paid out.

If the result of step S609 is negative and no BB win has been achieved, then in step S613 it is determined whether or not an RB win has been achieved. If an RB win has been achieved, then in step S614 the RB win flag set in the win flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared, and in step S615 the RB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Then, in step S616, the remaining payout counter is set to 90, and processing is performed to display 90 in the remaining payout number display section 61. The number set in step S616 corresponds to the upper limit payout number in the RB state, and the RB state is ended on the condition that medals equal to or more than this number have been paid out in the RB state.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding lottery table for BB/RB state is created. select. Furthermore, by performing the processing from step S614 to step S616, the gaming state shifts to the RB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the RB state based on the fact that the RB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB/RB state lottery table is created. select.

Figure 28 shows a lottery table for BB/RB states selected in the BB state transitioned to by the first BB or second BB, or the RB state transitioned to by RB. In the lottery table for BB/RB states, the point value PV for IV=1-28, 32-63 is set to "0", the point value PV for IV=29 is set to "65516", and the point value PV for IV=30, 31 is set to "10". Therefore, in the BB state or RB state, the probability of winning the first role in BB/RB (probability of winning when IV=29) is about 1 in 1.00, and the probability of winning the second role in BB/RB or the third role in BB/RB (probability of winning when IV=30, 31) is about 1 in 6560, and no loss events occur. Note that a configuration in which some losses occur may also be used.

The winning probabilities for the 1st BB, 2nd BB, and 3rd BB are the same for the 1st BB, 2nd BB, and RB. In addition, the winning probability for the 1st role in BB, the 2nd role in BB, and the 3rd role in BB is the same winning probability regardless of the trigger of transition to the BB state of the 1st BB or 2nd BB, or the trigger of transition to the RB state. For example, the 1st role among BB and RB in the 1st BB based on one winning of Tokurep A and the 1st role among BB and RB in the 2nd BB based on 2 wins of Tokurep AB, and The probability of winning is the same as that of BB in RB and 1st role in RB based on 3 repeat A winnings.

Figure 28 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode that can be achieved. As described above, the first small role winning is a winning mode that can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, if the first role in BB or RB is won, regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, either the first small role winning, the 39th small role winning, or the 40th small role winning will always be achieved. In addition, the 9th replay winning is also a winning mode that can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, if the second role in BB or RB is won, regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the 9th replay winning will always be achieved.

Which of the 3rd roles among BB and RB that allow the 9th and 10th replay wins will be established depends on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. When the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed, if both are possible, the stop drive control is performed so that the replay with the fewer slips will be established. More specifically, the combinations of symbols that result in the 9th and 10th replay wins are the same for the center reel 32M and the right reel 32R, that is, the "1st replay" symbol and the "2nd replay" symbol, but are different for the left reel 32L. That is, on the left reel 32L, the target symbols for the 9th replay are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, while the target symbols for the 10th replay are the "young man" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol.

For example, in a 3-bet game, if the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop when the 4th "cherry" to 7th "red bell" symbols on the left reel 32L reach the top row, both the 7th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 9th replay, and the 8th "watermelon" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 10th replay, can be stopped on the top row on the active line, but in this case, the stop drive control is performed to stop the 7th "red bell" symbol, which has the least number of slips, on the top row. As a result, the 9th replay win can be achieved instead of the 10th replay win. In addition, if the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop when the 9th "red 7" to 12th "white bell" symbols on the left reel 32L reach the top row, the drive control is performed to stop the 12th "white bell" symbol on the top row instead of the 13th "young man" symbol, so that the 9th replay wins more easily than the 10th replay. In other words, to win the 10th replay, the left stop switch 42 must be stopped when the 0th "Youth" symbol, the 8th "Watermelon" symbol, and the 13th "Youth" symbol reach the top of the left reel 32L; if it is stopped at any other time, the 9th replay will be won.

Since the BB state and RB state are 3-bet games, if you win the 1st prize in BB/RB, and if you win the 1st minor prize, the 39th minor prize, or the 40th minor prize, you will receive 9 coins. Medals are paid out. Furthermore, if the second prize in BB/RB is won, the ninth replay prize will be established, and even if the third prize in BB/RB is won, the ninth replay prize will be established in most cases. In other words, in the BB/RB state, either a bell win such as the first small role or a replay win such as the 9th replay is frequently achieved. When a replay win is established, no medals are paid out, but instead a replay is awarded and the next game can be played without requiring medals. Since the configuration is such that no miss occurs in the BB state or the RB state, it can be said that the BB state and the RB state are game states in which nine medals are paid out with a very high probability.

If the result of step S613 is negative and neither the BB nor the RB win has been achieved, a carryover command is set in step S617. The carryover command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the display control device 81 that the bonus win has not been achieved in the bonus winning game and that the so-called carryover state has occurred. This carryover command is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process.

As already explained, in games played in the carryover state, the ability to win other bonuses is restricted. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal game state (FIG. 17), if a player wins an overlapping role with a bonus (first BB, second BB, RB, CB) with IV=32 to 62, the winning flags corresponding to these bonuses are not set. Therefore, for example, if a player wins an overlapping role with each of the minor roles with IV=32 to 62 or a replay, the winning flags for these minor roles and the replay are set, but the winning flags corresponding to the bonuses are not set, and only the winning of the minor role is valid. In other words, the carryover state can be said to be a state in which the selection of bonuses is restricted.

If the game state has transitioned to the CB state, BB state or RB state, a positive determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S618. In the end determination process, it is determined whether the value of the remaining payout counter has reached 0, and if it has reached 0, a process is performed to clear the CB setting flag, BB setting flag or RB setting flag. Furthermore, in the end determination process, if the BB setting flag or RB setting flag is cleared, an end flag is set to indicate that the BB state or RB state has ended in this game. The end determination process will be described in detail later.

As shown in steps S602 to S618, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game returns to the gaming state when the CB winning was achieved. For example, if a CB winning is achieved under the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is returned to after the CB state ends, and if a CB winning is achieved under the 3rd RT state, the 3rd RT state is returned after the CB state ends. to return to. On the other hand, if the first BB, second BB, or RB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether the corresponding BB win or RB win is established. Therefore, if the BB setting flag or RB setting flag is cleared, that is, if the BB state or RB state ends, even if the 1st BB winning is achieved under the 2nd RT state, the state will not shift to the normal gaming state. becomes. In the case of transition to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the CB state ends. When the game enters the BB state, the player can expect an increase of about 180 (=9×30−3×30) medals until the BB state ends. When the game shifts to the RB state, the player can expect an increase of about 60 (=9×10−3×10) medals until the RB state ends.

Incidentally, in the BB state or RB state, if the second winning combination among BB/RB or the third winning combination among BB/RB is won and a replay is awarded, the remaining payout number counter is not subtracted. In other words, the number of times a player wins the second prize in BB/RB or the third prize in BB/RB in the BB state or RB state does not affect the expected increase in the number of medals in the BB state or RB state. On the other hand, the number of times you win the 2nd role in BB/RB or the 3rd role in BB/RB in the BB state or RB state affects the number of games played in the BB state or RB state, and The number of games executed in these BB states and RB states increases by the number of times a player wins the 2nd prize or the 3rd prize among BB and RB.

If none of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, RB winning flag, or CB winning flag is set (if step S602 is NO), if none of the first BB winning, second BB winning, RB winning, or CB winning is established and a carryover command is set (if the processing of step S617 is executed), if a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout counter in steps S605, S612, and S616, and if the end determination processing is performed in step S618, the process proceeds to step S606 and a status command is set. Here, the status command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the player to grasp the game status at the time of the end of the game (i.e., the game status of the next game), and in step S606, a status command corresponding to the setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is set. After setting the status command, in step S607, an external signal setting process is performed to set an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10. Then, the process ends.

<Overview of game state transitions and display modes>
Here, the transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to Figure 29. Note that the CB state is not shown in the figure.

When the gaming state is BB state or RB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 270, and the RB state ends when the number of medals paid out under the RB state reaches 90. The game ends and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

When the game state is the normal game state, the game state transitions to the first RT state when the transition result stops on a winning line, the game state transitions to the BB state when a BB win is made, and the game state transitions to the RB state when an RB win is made. The transition result stops on a winning line when a miss occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the normal game state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4, which trigger a transition to the second RT state, and the second promotion replays 1 and 2, which trigger a transition to the third RT state, are not won, so there is no transition from the normal game state to the second RT state to the third RT state (see Figure 17).

When the gaming state is the first RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. The third replay win is achieved when you win any of the first promoted replays 1 to 4 and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(a)). . In the lottery process using the first RT state lottery table, the second promoted replays 1 and 2, which trigger the transition to the third RT state, are not won, so the first RT state does not transition to the third RT state.

In addition, if a BB win or RB win is not achieved in a game in which a BB win flag or RB win flag is set, i.e., if the BB win flag or RB win flag is carried over, the game state will transition to the normal game state, and if a BB win or RB win is achieved in a game in which a BB win flag or RB win flag is set, the game state will transition to the BB state or RB state.

When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-gaming win or the fifth re-gaming winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game winning is established and when the transferred number stops on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. The fourth replay win and the fifth replay win are achieved when you win the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined order of operations (Fig. 23(b) )reference). The second re-game winning is achieved when one of the falling replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll will stop on the active line if a missed call occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In addition, if a corresponding BB win or RB win is not achieved in a game in which each BB win flag or RB win flag is set, that is, if the BB win flag or RB win flag is carried over, the gaming state will change. The game state shifts to a normal gaming state, and when a corresponding BB winning or RB winning is established in a game in which each BB winning flag or RB winning flag is set, the gaming state shifts to a BB state or an RB state.

When the gaming state is the third RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game winning is established and when the transferred number stops on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. The third replay win is achieved when the player wins BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 and operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(c)). The second re-game winning is achieved when one of the falling replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll will stop on the active line if a missed call occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In addition, if a corresponding BB win or RB win is not achieved in a game in which each BB win flag or RB win flag is set, that is, if the BB win flag or RB win flag is carried over, the gaming state will change. The game state shifts to a normal gaming state, and when a corresponding BB winning or RB winning is established in a game in which each BB winning flag or RB winning flag is set, the gaming state shifts to a BB state or an RB state.

In this slot machine 10, the main control device 101 manages seven types of game states: normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, BB state, RB state, and CB state, and also manages five types of display modes, broadly classified as normal mode, CZ mode (chance zone mode), AT mode (assist time mode), VB mode (pseudo bonus mode), and BB/RB mode.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing transitions between display modes.

The BB/RB mode is a display mode which is entered when the first BB win, second BB win or RB win is achieved, and which ends when the BB state or RB state ends. In other words, the BB/RB mode is a display mode which corresponds to the BB state or RB state. Therefore, when entering the BB/RB mode, if it corresponds to a transition to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of approximately 180 medals, and if it corresponds to a transition to the RB state, the player can expect an increase of approximately 60 medals.

When transitioning from the normal mode or CZ mode to the BB/RB mode, a lottery for transition to the CZ mode and a lottery for transition to the AT mode may be performed in the BB/RB mode. If you win the lottery to transition to AT mode, you will transition to AT mode after BB/RB mode ends, and if you win the lottery to transition to CZ mode, you will transition to CZ mode after BB/RB mode ends. do. If you do not win any transition lottery, you may transition to normal mode after BB/RB mode ends, or transition to the mode you were in before transitioning to BB/RB mode, such as CZ mode. . If the AT mode is changed to the BB/RB mode, the AT mode is returned to after the BB/RB mode ends. When transitioning from the VB mode to the BB/RB mode, the VB mode is returned to after the BB/RB mode ends.

Normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "press order replay") is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for transition to the CZ mode is held. If the lottery for shifting to CZ mode is won, the mode shifts from normal mode to CZ mode. There is no transition from normal mode to AT mode or VB mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each gaming state of a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, and a CB state. However, in the normal mode, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, so it is rare for the stop switches 42 to 44 to shift to the second RT state to the third RT state. This almost corresponds to the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the 1st RT state, you can expect that the medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time you play one game, and if the gaming state at that time is the 2nd RT state ~ In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The CZ mode, like the normal mode, is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. In the CZ mode, a lottery for transition to the AT mode is held. That is, although the CZ mode is not notified of the operation order like the normal mode, it is set as a mode that allows transition to the AT mode. If the lottery to shift to AT mode is won, the mode shifts from CZ mode to AT mode. If the CZ mode ends without winning the transition lottery, the CZ mode shifts to the normal mode. There is no transition to VB mode from CZ mode.

The CZ mode corresponds to each of the game states of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the CZ mode, since the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when a push order replay is won, it is rare to transition to the second RT state to the third RT state, and it corresponds almost entirely to the normal game state or the first RT state. In the CZ mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that approximately 1.59 medals will be lost for each game played, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state to the third RT state, it can be expected that approximately 0.06 medals will be lost for each game played.

The AT mode is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The AT mode has a different probability of transitioning to the VB mode. 1 mode ~ ATLV. It is composed of four AT modes, and in any of the AT modes, the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher than in the normal mode. If the lottery for shifting to VB mode is won, the mode shifts from AT mode to VB mode. Transition to VB mode If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, etc.) without winning the lottery, the AT mode is shifted to the normal mode.

The ATLV.1 to ATLV.4 modes are set to have different probabilities of winning the lottery for transition to VB mode. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to VB mode is set to be highest in ATLV.4 mode and lowest in ATLV.1 mode, and the order of the probability of winning the lottery for transition to VB mode increases in the order of ATLV.1 mode, ATLV.2 mode, ATLV.3 mode, and ATLV.4 mode.

The AT mode corresponds to each of the game states of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the AT mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, so if the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation sequence, it corresponds to the second RT state to the third RT state. In the AT mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it is expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 for each game played, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state to the third RT state, it is expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game played. Since the AT mode continues for at least 50 games after the game state transitions to the second RT state, when the game state transitions to the AT mode, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals.

The VB mode, like the AT mode, is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The difference between VB mode and AT mode is that when you win 2nd promotion replay 1 or 2nd promotion replay 2, in AT mode you will be notified of the order of operations to make the 1st replay win. , in the VB mode, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game win or the fifth re-game win is notified (see FIG. 23(b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each gaming state: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, and a CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. Therefore, the VB mode corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order. In VB mode, if the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the 1st RT state, you can expect the medals to increase by about 0.61 each time you play one game, and if the gaming state at that time is the 2nd RT state ~ In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the VB mode continues for at least 25 games after the gaming state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when shifting to the VB mode.

Regarding the transition of display modes when a player's owned medals increase, the general flow is to transition from normal mode to CZ mode, from CZ mode to AT mode, and then back from AT mode to normal mode. In AT mode, a lottery is held to transition to VB mode, so if a loop occurs in which the player transitions from AT mode to VB mode and then back to AT mode, the player can expect to increase the number of owned medals.

As mentioned above, when comparing the normal mode and the CZ mode, the setting is such that the player can win the lottery to change from the normal mode to the AT mode without changing from the CZ mode to the AT mode. Therefore, the CZ mode is also called a so-called chance zone where transition to the AT mode is expected.

Also, in AT mode, ATLV. 1 mode ~ ATLV. Four modes are set, and in each AT mode, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode is different. When transitioning from normal mode or CZ mode to AT mode, basically ATLV. Shift to 1 mode. ATLV. 1 mode, a lottery to switch to VB mode is held, and ATLV. A lottery will be held to select the mode 2. ATLV. If you win the lottery to switch to 2 mode, you will receive ATLV. 2 mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to VB mode increases. ATLV. 2 mode, a lottery to switch to VB mode is held, and ATLV. A lottery will be held to switch to 3 modes. ATLV. If you win the lottery to switch to 3 modes, you will receive an ATLV. 3 mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to VB mode increases. And ATLV. 3 mode, a lottery to switch to VB mode is held, and ATLV. A lottery will be held to switch to 4 modes. ATLV. If you win the lottery to switch to 4 mode, you will receive ATLV. 4 mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to VB mode increases.

Therefore, when transitioning to AT mode, ATLV. 1 mode → ATLV. 2 modes → ATLV. 3 modes → ATLV. By promoting the 4 mode and the AT mode, the probability of transition to the VB mode increases, and a loop between the AT mode and the VB mode becomes more likely to occur.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of medals owned in each of the display modes, AT mode, VB mode, and BB/RB mode. In addition, in conjunction with each display mode, multiple RT states and multiple states such as BB state, RB state, and CB state are switched back and forth depending on the winning of each replay or the stopping of the transition result. As described above, when the push order replay is won or the push order bell is won, the corresponding replay winning is achieved or the transition result is stopped depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-43. Also, in the AT mode and VB mode, when the push order bell is won, the operation sequence that can achieve the first minor role winning is announced, so that the player can expect to increase the number of medals owned.

The configuration regarding the display mode will be explained below.

The configuration related to the display mode can be roughly divided into: (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) based on the winning result. and (4) processing related to notification effects on the sub side. Below, they will be explained in order.

<Processing for lottery for switching display modes>
<Lottery result processing>
The process related to the display mode transition lottery in (1) is performed in the lottery result response process (step S312) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main control device 101. Hereinafter, the lottery result response process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S701, it is determined whether either the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The AT mode winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify that the player has won the AT mode transition lottery, and is set when the AT mode transition lottery is won. This is a flag that is cleared when The AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is AT mode, and is set when transitioning to AT mode, and when AT mode finally ends (from AT mode to VB mode or This is a flag that is cleared in special zones (except when transitioning to BB/RB mode). If a negative determination is made in step S701, a first specific combination process is executed in step S702.

<First specific role processing>
The first specific role processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the first specific role processing is performed when the AT mode has not been won, and the display mode in this case corresponds to normal mode or CZ mode. In the first specific role processing, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not the display mode should be switched to CZ mode, and a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not the display mode should be switched to AT mode.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether the current display mode is in the CZ mode. Not being in CZ mode means that the current display mode is normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for CZ mode lottery in step S802. In the normal table, the probability of transition to the CZ mode is set depending on the type of lottery result (winning combination).

Specifically, the mode lottery tables stored in the various table storage areas 105a are set so that the probability of winning each mode transition lottery is different depending on the current display mode and the type of game result that triggers the lottery. has been done.

Here, as shown in FIG. 37, the game results that trigger the mode transition lottery are set as follows: strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, Chance A, Chance B, middle bell, strong cherry overlap 1, weak cherry overlap 1, strong watermelon overlap 1, weak watermelon overlap 1, Chance A overlap 1, Chance B overlap 1, middle bell overlap 1, special lip A overlap 1, special lip A overlap 2, special lip A overlap 3, single BB 1, single BB 2, and single RB (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "transition trigger roles"). Regardless of the setting value, the point value PV set for these transition trigger roles is the same, and there is no setting difference in the winning probability. And, the winning probability of each mode transition lottery is set so that there is no setting difference. In contrast, strong cherry overlap 2, weak cherry overlap 2, strong watermelon overlap 2, weak watermelon overlap 2, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 2, middle bell overlap 2, special lip AB overlap 1, special lip AB overlap 2, strong cherry overlap 3, weak cherry overlap 3, strong watermelon overlap 3, weak watermelon overlap 3, chance A overlap 3, chance B overlap 3, middle bell overlap 3, special lip AB overlap 3 are set to have a set difference in the winning probability, and the point value PV is set so that setting 1 generally has the lowest winning probability and setting 6 has the highest winning probability (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "non-trigger roles"). And, for these non-trigger roles with a set difference in the winning probability, the mode transition lottery is not held. In other words, the mode transition lottery is held with no set difference in the winning probability for transition trigger roles with a common appearance rate, and the transition rate for each mode transition is common.

In the lottery table for transition to CZ mode obtained in step S802, the probability of winning the transition lottery is set according to the type of transition trigger role. As shown in FIG. 38, for example, in the normal time table, if the transition trigger role is a strong cherry, there is a 15% probability of winning the transition lottery to CZ mode, and if it is a weak cherry, there is a 3% probability of winning the transition lottery to CZ mode, and it is set so that the lower the winning probability (appearance rate) in each game, the easier it is to win the transition lottery to CZ mode.

After acquiring the CZ mode transition lottery table in step S802, the CZ mode lottery process is executed in step S803. In this process, a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 and compared with the lottery table acquired in step S802, thereby performing a lottery for transition to the CZ mode.

Incidentally, in the lottery for transition to CZ mode in step S803 in this embodiment, the lottery for transition to CZ mode cannot be carried out in a carryover state where any bonus winning flag is carried over or during any bonus state. More specifically, it is set so that the player cannot win the lottery for switching to the CZ mode. In other words, in a game after any of the 1st BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag, or RB winning flag is set, no winnings will be made in the lottery for transition to CZ mode, and if the display mode is BB/RB mode, will not win the lottery for switching to CZ mode.

In step S804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to the CZ mode has been won, based on the processing result of step S803. If the lottery for transition to the CZ mode has not been won, the first specific combination processing is immediately ended. If the CZ mode transition lottery is won, in step S805, a process of setting a CZ mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is executed. Thereafter, in steps S806 to S809, processing for setting the precursor mode is performed. The omen mode is a mode in which a win-suggesting effect suggesting that the player has won the CZ mode etc. is more likely to occur, and after playing each game in the omen mode, the winning notification that the player has won the CZ mode etc. will be announced. . The omen mode continues from 0 games to 32 games, and the number of consecutive games of the omen mode is set to vary depending on the type of winning CZ mode etc. and whether or not the bonus is won at the same time. In addition, in this embodiment, if the CZ mode etc. is won at the same time as the bonus, the winning notification of the bonus is performed after passing through the omen mode, and the winning of the CZ mode etc. is announced after the bonus state ends. An announcement will be made. Further, when the number of portent games is set as 0 games, the winning notification will be performed without going through the portent mode.

Specifically, in step S806, a process is performed to obtain the premonition game number table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 39, in the premonition game number table, the number of premonition games to be selected is set to be different depending on the current display mode and the display mode that has been selected and whether or not a bonus has been won at the same time. Specifically, when the current display mode is the normal mode and when the CZ mode is won, if the bonus has not been won at the same time, 1 to 5 games are selected with a 90% probability, and 6 to 10 games are selected with a 10% probability. On the other hand, even if the current display mode is the normal mode, if the CZ mode and the bonus have been won at the same time, the premonition mode of 0 games is selected with a 100% probability. In other words, when the display mode is the normal mode, if the bonus has been won at the same time, a shorter premonition game number is more likely to be selected than when the bonus has not been won at the same time, and if the bonus and the CZ mode have been won at the same time, the premonition mode is not set (the premonition mode of 0 games is set), and the winning notification is made without going through the premonition mode. The premonition mode is set not only when the CZ mode is selected during normal mode, but also when the AT mode is selected during CZ mode, and when the VB mode is selected during AT mode. In this embodiment, the premonition mode is set to 0 games in all cases.

In step S807, the number of games in the current portent mode is drawn by lottery based on the table of number of portent games obtained in step S806 and the lottery counters obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S808, processing is performed to input the number of precursor games into the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The omen counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game, and when the omen counter becomes 0, the omen mode ends and a winning notification is made that the player has won the transition lottery such as AT mode.

In step S809, a process is executed to set the premonition command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is the sub-side control device. The premonition command includes information on the lottery result that triggered the premonition mode (the display mode to which the premonition mode will be transitioned after the premonition mode) and the number of premonition games. The process on the display control device 81 side based on receiving the premonition command will be explained in detail later. After the process of step S809 is executed, the first specific role process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S801 that the game is in CZ mode, the process proceeds to step S810, where a CZ mode table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a as a table for AT mode lottery. In the CZ mode table, the probability of transitioning to AT mode is set according to the type of lottery result (winning role).

The AT mode transition lottery process (step S811) using the CZ mode table will be described in detail later, but an overview of the CZ mode table will be provided first. In the CZ mode table, as shown in FIG. 38, the probability of winning the transition lottery is set according to the type of transition trigger role. For example, in the CZ mode table, if the transition trigger role is a strong cherry, there is a 45% probability of winning the transition lottery to the AT mode, and if it is a weak cherry, there is a 15% probability of winning the transition lottery to the AT mode, and it is set so that the lower the winning probability (appearance rate) in each game, the easier it is to win the transition lottery to the AT mode.

After the AT mode lottery process is executed in step S811, it is determined in step S812 whether or not the result of the AT mode lottery process is an AT mode winning. If the AT mode is not won, the first specific combination processing is ended.

If the AT mode has been won, step S813 determines whether the currently won AT mode is the SAT mode. The SAT mode is an AT mode that starts after passing through the add-on specialization zone. For example, if the initial number of games in the normal AT mode is 50, the SAT mode starts with the initial number of games of 50 plus the number of games added in the add-on specialization zone. Therefore, the degree of advantage for the player differs between the normal AT mode and the SAT mode, with the SAT mode being more advantageous for the player than the AT mode.

The lottery for transition to SAT mode is held when the lottery for transition to AT mode is won (when the lottery process of step S811 is won), and this lottery is held based on the transition lottery table for SAT mode that is set by the transition trigger. As shown in FIG. 38, the transition lottery table for SAT mode is set so that, for example, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to AT mode triggered by a strong watermelon is 25%, and 50% of those who win the lottery for transition will win the SAT mode, so that in effect, when a strong watermelon is won during CZ mode, 12.5% of the time the mode will transition to AT mode, and 12.5% of the time the mode will transition to SAT mode.

If it is determined in step S813 that the SAT mode has been won, a process of setting a specialized zone winning flag is executed in step S814.

If the result of step S813 is negative, or after the process of step S814 has been executed, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag is executed in step S815. In other words, when the AT mode is won, the AT mode winning flag is set, and in some cases (when the SAT mode is won), the specialized zone winning flag is set.

After performing the process of step S815, the process for setting the precursor mode is performed in steps S806 to S809, and then the first specific combination process is ended. Note that, as described above, 0 games are set in the precursor mode when the AT mode or SAT mode is won (FIG. 39).

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result response process (FIG. 31), if a negative judgment is made in step S701, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S703, it is judged whether or not either the VB mode winning flag or the VB mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode winning flag is set when the VB mode transition lottery is won, and is cleared when transitioning to the VB mode. The VB mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the VB mode, and is set when transitioning to the VB mode and is cleared when the VB mode ends. If a negative judgment is made in step S703, a second specific role process is executed in step S704. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step S703, a third specific role process is executed in step S705.

<Second specific role processing>
The second specific combination processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The case where the second specific role processing is performed corresponds to the AT mode. In the second specific role processing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to transition the display mode to the VB mode or the add-on specialized zone. The add-on specialized zone indicates a state in which the number of continued games in the AT zone is added with a high probability over multiple games. In addition, in the second specific role processing, a lottery is performed to promote the level of the AT mode, and processing for adding the number of continued games in the AT mode is performed.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether any of the bonuses are being carried over or any of the bonuses are being carried over. If the player is in the carryover state or the bonus state, the second specific combination processing is immediately ended. That is, in the present embodiment, during the bonus carryover state or the bonus state, the lottery for transition to the VB mode, the lottery for promotion of the AT mode level, the additional lottery, etc. are not performed. If a negative determination is made in step S901, the process advances to step S902.

In step S902, a process is performed to determine the AT mode level. As already explained, in this embodiment, four AT mode levels, ATLV.1 mode to ATLV.4 mode, are provided, and the probability of transitioning to VB mode differs for each level. Therefore, in step S902, it is determined whether the current AT mode level is ATLV.1 mode to ATLV.4 mode.

In step S903, the VB mode lottery table corresponding to the level of the AT mode grasped in step S902 is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. As shown in FIG. 38, for example, between strong cherry 1 and weak cherry, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set higher for strong cherry 1 than for weak cherry. In addition, in the VB mode lottery table of each level, the probability of transition to the VB mode is generally different, and it is set so that the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher for ATLV.2 mode than for ATLV.1 mode, the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher for ATLV.3 mode than for ATLV.2 mode, and the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher for ATLV.4 mode than for ATLV.3 mode.

In step S904, a VB mode transition lottery is performed using the table acquired in step S903 and the lottery counter acquired from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. Then, in step S905, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S904 corresponds to a win in VB mode. Note that in this embodiment, when a VB mode transition lottery is performed using a combination with a bonus as a transition trigger role, the transition lottery to the VB mode is not won. In other words, the transition to BB/RB mode and the transition to VB mode are prevented from overlapping as much as possible, and the advantage of the combination with the bonus is not increased too much.

If the result of the judgment in step S905 is positive, a process is performed in step S906 to set a VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. After that, a process for setting the premonition game number is performed in steps S907 to S910. That is, a premonition game number table is obtained in step S907, the premonition game number is drawn in step S908, the premonition game number is set in step S909, and the premonition command is set in step S910, and then the second specific role processing is terminated. However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, for VB mode winning during AT mode, the premonition game number is set to 0 in all cases. Therefore, if VB mode is won during AT mode, the winning notification will be made in the next game.

If it is determined in step S905 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not a VB mode winning, the process advances to step S911. Steps S911 to S914 are processes for promoting the AT mode level.

In step S911, AT mode promotion lottery processing is performed. In this process, a promotion lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. There are multiple tables for promotion lottery depending on the level of AT mode, specifically ATLV. 1 mode table, ATLV. Table for 2 modes, ATLV. There are tables for 3 modes, and a total of 3 (promotion lottery will not be held when staying in ATLV.4 mode). At each table, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set depending on the type of game result that triggers the lottery. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. Also, in the table for each AT mode, ATLV. ATLV. than the table for 1 mode. ATLV.2 mode tables have a lower promotion probability. ATLV. The table for 3 modes is set so that the probability of promotion is lower, and as the level of AT mode is promoted, it is set so that it becomes difficult to be promoted to the next level.

In step S912, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S911 is a promotion win. If the promotion has been won, AT mode promotion processing is performed in step S913. In this process, the level flags provided in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 are rewritten from the level flags corresponding to the current AT mode level to the level flags one level higher. Thereafter, in step S914, processing is performed to set the promotion command as an output target to the display control device 81. The promotion command includes information on the AT mode of the promotion destination. The display control device 81 that has received the promotion command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like to perform the AT mode presentation of the level to which the promotion destination is to be promoted. As an effect for the AT mode on the auxiliary display section 65, for example, a different background color effect is set depending on the level of the AT mode, and the display control device 81, when receiving the above promotion command, displays an effect for the AT mode. Notification is made that the level has been promoted, and control is performed so that an AT mode presentation is performed with a background color corresponding to the level to which the level has been promoted.

If it is determined in step S912 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the process in step S914 is executed, processes for increasing the number of consecutive games in the AT mode are performed in steps S915 to S929.

That is, in step S915, an additional lottery process for the number of AT mode games is performed. In this additional lottery process, tables for the AT mode additional lottery are acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. As shown in FIG. 41, the AT mode supplementary lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the supplementary lottery differs depending on the type of lottery result.

Here, in this embodiment, regarding the AT mode game number addition lottery, it is set so that a push order bell or a push order replay can also be used as a trigger for the lottery. As shown in Figure 37, for the push order bell and push order replay (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order"), a common point value PV is set regardless of the setting value, and is set as the winning probability. There is no difference. Furthermore, the probability of winning the lottery for adding up the number of games to be held based on the winning combination and the number of additional games at the time of winning are also set so that there is no difference in settings. In other words, there is no setting difference in the additional performance triggered by the push order. In addition, the above-mentioned transition trigger combination is included in these push order combinations, and is also referred to as a specific combination in the following explanation as a combination that triggers a lottery regarding the instruction function.

As shown in FIG. 41, among the specific combinations, the push order combination has a lower probability of winning the AT mode game number addition lottery than the transition trigger combination. Therefore, the number of games in the AT mode can be expected to be increased more when a transition trigger combination appears than when a push order combination appears as a lottery result of each game. In this case, it is thought that the player will proceed with the game while expecting to win the transition trigger combination based on this premise. On the other hand, the push order combination has a higher winning probability in each game than the transition trigger combination, and can be said to be a game result that is relatively likely to appear. With such a combination of winnings, it is possible to reduce the presence of the push-order winning combination as a bonus opportunity role and increase the surprise when a bonus occurs. Moreover, the chances of bonuses being added based on these winning hands can realistically occur during AT mode (more specifically, if you play the initial number of games of 50 games 2 to 3 times, it will occur at least once). (occurrence rate is about the same as that expected). Therefore, it is possible to suitably generate unexpected bonuses such as bonuses triggered by the above-mentioned push order.

If it is determined that the bonus lottery has been won, it is determined in step S917 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S918, and lottery processing for the number of additional games in AT mode is performed. In this process of lottery for the number of additional games, a table for the AT mode lottery for the number of additional games is obtained from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The AT mode extra game number lottery table is set so that the number of extra games varies depending on the type of specific combination, as shown in FIG. For example, in Strong Cherry, AT mode is added from 20 games to 200 games, and the average number of added games is 30 games. In addition, for weak cherry, 5 to 300 games are added, and the average number of additional games is 20 games, and although there are cases where a larger number of games is selected for weak cherry than for strong cherry, The average value is set so that strong cherries play more games.

In step S919, a process for adding the number of games in the AT mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of added games drawn in step S918 is added to a counter that manages the number of continued games in the AT mode (more specifically, an AT mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106). In the following step S920, a process for notifying the player that the add-on lottery has been won and the number of games to be played is performed.

<Additional notification processing>
Here, in this slot machine 10, a plurality of modes of additional notification are set when an additional number of consecutive games in the AT mode occurs. More specifically, there are multiple modes of additional notification, with different games in which the additional notification is performed, and additional notification may be performed in the game in which the additional notification occurs or in a series of games triggered by the game in which the additional notification occurs. (In the following explanation, it is also referred to as "immediate addition notification"), and when the notification game is determined after the fact in a game that is later than the game in which the addition occurred (in the following explanation, it is called "immediate addition notification"). (also referred to as "later-on-board notification") is set.

In the instant add-on notification, a series of games triggered by a game where an add-on occurs refers to, for example, a case where a premonition mode or a continuous effect occurs triggered by the game where an add-on occurs, and a series of games refers to games that can continue from the game where the add-on occurred over multiple games. The series of games also includes cases where continuous effects do not occur, for example, a corresponding effect does not occur in the game where an add-on occurs, and an add-on notification occurs in the next game or multiple games later, and the game where the add-on occurred and the games up until the add-on notification occur are considered to be a series of games, and such types of add-on notification are also included in the instant add-on notification.

On the other hand, in post-add notification, the notification game that is determined after the fact and is a game that is later than the game where the add-on occurred is not determined in the game where the add-on occurred, but, for example, when the AT mode is about to end. This differs from the series of games in the instant ride notification described above in that the notification timing is determined after the fact as the AT mode progresses, such as a game. In other words, the above-mentioned notification game can be said to be a game that is set without being triggered by the game in which the add-on has occurred.

The following describes the overview of the display contents of the auxiliary display unit 65 for the immediate loading notification and later loading notification with reference to Figure 42.

As described above, the immediate add-on notification notifies a portion of the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (number of games remaining in advantageous zone ZG), while the later add-on notification notifies the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. later. If the number of games notified first is the display remaining number counter HG, and the number of games notified later is the later add-on counter BG, the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (number of games remaining in advantageous zone ZG) will be equal to the sum of the display remaining number counter HG and the later add-on counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by one each time a game is played, and the later add-on counter BG is not decremented unless a later add-on notification occurs, even if a game is played.

As shown in FIG. 42, in this embodiment, when the remaining number of games displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (remaining number of games display ZGP) reaches a predetermined number (1) during the AT mode, i.e., when the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number (1), a later-add notification is generated. The later-add notification notifies the player that the number of games corresponding to the later-add counter BG (150 in the figure) has been added. In this case, the later-add counter BG is decremented by the notification amount (becoming 0 in the figure), and the display remaining number counter HG is updated by adding the notification amount due to the later-add notification, and the remaining number of games display ZGP in the auxiliary display unit 65 also becomes a value corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG (150 after one game has been played in the figure).

In this way, in the case of an additional win, if the additional notification is selected, there may be a difference between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (number of remaining games in advantageous section ZG). On the other hand, when the immediate ride notification is selected, there is no difference between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (number of remaining games in advantageous section ZG). In this slot machine 10, the post-pay counter BG is referred to when winning an additional bid, and depending on the current value of the post-pay counter BG, whether post-pay notification or immediate pay notification is selected differs.

In the process for additional notification in step S920 described above, the game for which additional notification is to be performed is set, and when additional notification is performed in the game, the execution timing of the additional notification is set. That is, as shown in FIG. 34, first, in step S1001, processing is performed to grasp the post-load counter BG of the various counter areas 106e. In the following step S1002, a notification game lottery process is executed. The notification game lottery process is a lottery process that determines whether the current additional notification will be a later notification or an immediate notification. In the notification game lottery process, a postcard lottery table is obtained from the various table storage areas 105a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to post a postpay notification according to the value of the postpay counter BG grasped in step S1001.

As shown in FIG. 43, the deferred entry lottery table is set so that the probability that the deferred entry notification will be selected differs depending on the value of the deferred entry counter BG and the type of the specific combination that triggered the additional winning. There is. For example, when adding a strong cherry as a trigger, if the post-add counter BG is less than 30, post-add notification is selected at 20% (immediate add-on notification is selected at 80%); When the load counter BG is 30 or more and less than 100, the rear load notification is selected at 10%, and when the rear load counter BG is 100 or more, the rear load notification is selected at 5%, so that the value of the rear load counter BG is large. The selection rate for later notification is set to be lower as the time increases.

In addition, the type of specific role that triggers an additional win is set so that the selection rate of the additional win when the value of the additional win counter BG is small is higher for so-called normal roles (high probability trigger result, high probability result) such as various push order replays and various push order bells, which have a relatively high probability of winning, than for so-called rare roles (low probability trigger result, low probability result) such as strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, and weak watermelons, which have a relatively low probability of winning. More specifically, in the notification game lottery process triggered by various push order replays and various push order bells, when the later win counter BG is less than 30, the later win notification is selected with a 100% probability.

As described above, after the remaining display counter HG reaches a predetermined number, additional notification is performed, and the additional notification is subtracted from the post-addition counter BG. Therefore, basically, as the AT mode game progresses, the value of the post-play counter BG often increases, and conversely, at the beginning of the AT mode game, the value of the post-play counter BG is 0 or small. Likely to be a value.

In other words, if an additional win occurs in the early stages of play in AT mode, there is a high probability that the later-addition notification will be selected. In particular, if an additional win occurs as a result of a normal role that is not a rare role such as a push order replay or push order bell, the later-addition notification will always be selected in the early stages of AT mode. As a result, after the start of the AT mode, the later-addition counter BG tends to accumulate relatively quickly.

After executing the notification game lottery process in step S1002, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not a later-addition win has been made. If a later-addition win has not been made and immediate-addition notification has been selected, in step S1004, a process is performed to add the current additional-addition winning game to the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter area 106e. Then, in step S1005, a notification timing setting process is executed to set the timing at which the additional-addition notification will be made in the current game. The notification timing setting process is a process for setting the timing at which the additional-addition notification will be made in the current game.

In one game, the timing of the additional notification is set to differ depending on the number of additional games. Specifically, as shown in the execution timing table in FIG. 44, the execution timing of the additional notification in the current game is set to be when the first reel is stopped, when the second reel is stopped, and when the third reel is stopped, assuming that the order of the stop operations for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel. Also, the timing of the stop ON operation, which is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed among the stop operations for each reel, and the stop OFF operation, which is when the pressing operation is ended, are set.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44. The stop switches 42 to 44 are movable from an initial position located at the frontmost side to an operating position located at the rearmost side. When placed at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in a LOW state, and by being operated from the initial position to the operating position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are Switches from LOW signal to HI signal. Then, the main controller 101 determines that a stop ON operation has been performed, which means that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been pressed, based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal.

The stop switches 42-44 are also biased toward their initial positions by springs or the like. Therefore, when the hand is released from the stop switches 42-44 and the operating force (pressing force) applied to the operating positions is no longer applied, the stop switches 42-44 return to their initial positions by the biasing force of the springs or the like. In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a switch from a HI signal to a LOW signal. Then, based on the detection signal switching from a HI signal to a LOW signal, the main control device 101 determines that a stop OFF operation has been performed, which means that the pressing operation of the stop switches 42-44 has ended.

The top-up notification is set to occur when the stop switch 42-44 is operated to stop either when the stop switch is turned on or when the stop switch is turned off. In other words, in a game in which the top-up notification occurs, the top-up effect can occur not only when the stop switch 42-44 is pressed, but also when the pressing operation ends.

In the addition notification execution timing table, when the number of addition games is relatively small, for example, when an addition occurs from 5 to 10 games, the timing when the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%. , the timing when the first reel's stop OFF operation was performed is 10%, the second reel's stop ON operation is 15%, the second reel's stop OFF operation is 20%, the third reel's stop ON operation is 20%, The stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is 30%, and each is selected. In this case, the stop OFF operation of each reel is easier to select than the stop ON operation, and the rear side operation is also easier to select.

On the other hand, when the number of added games is relatively large, for example 100 or more games are added, the timing when the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected 5% of the time, the stop OFF operation of the first reel is selected 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is selected 5%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is selected 30%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is selected 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is selected 45% of the time. In this case too, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation, and the operation on the rear side is relatively more likely to be selected.

In other words, in this embodiment, the system is set up so that an additional notification occurs more easily when the reels are turned off than when they are turned on. Also, when comparing the first to third reels, the system is set up so that the third reel is most likely to be selected when it is stopped (turned on, turned off), the second reel is next most likely to be selected when it is stopped, and the first reel is least likely to be selected when it is stopped.

In relation to the number of added games, the greater the number of added games, the easier it becomes to select the timing for the third reel stop OFF operation. In other words, if a player knows in advance that an added notification will occur, if the added notification does not occur by the time the third reel stop ON operation is performed, the player is likely to execute the third reel stop OFF operation while highly anticipating the addition of a large number of games.

In step S1005, the execution timing of the add-on notification in the current game is set based on the execution timing table for the add-on notification. After that, this add-on notification process is terminated. In this case, information that the current add-on will be notified in the current game as an immediate add-on notification, and information regarding the execution timing of the add-on notification in the current game are set in the add-on command in the add-on command set process (step S921) executed following this add-on notification process. The display control device 81, which receives the add-on command containing this information, sets the add-on notification presentation based on this information. This process will be explained later.

If it is determined in step S1003 that the player has won the later-addition lottery, the process proceeds to step S1006. In step S1006, a process is executed to add the current number of added-on games to the later-addition counter BG provided in the various counter area 106e. Then, in step S1007, a process is executed to set the later-addition flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the process for notifying the player of this added-on is terminated.

The rear loading flag is used by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 to indicate that the rear loading notification should be performed when the value of the rear loading counter BG is larger than 0 and the remaining display counter HG reaches a predetermined value. This is a flag for understanding. Further, in this case, in the additional command setting process that is executed subsequent to the main additional notification process, information that the additional notification will not occur in the current game is set in the additional command. The display control device 81 that has received the additional command including this information performs control so that no additional notification occurs in the current game.

Returning to the explanation of the second specific winning combination process (FIG. 33), after executing the add-on notification process in step S920, the add-on command including the processing result of the add-on notification process is sent to the display control device 81 in step S921. After performing the process of setting it as an output target, the second specific combination process ends.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S917, the process advances to step S922. In step S922, the AT mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second specific combination processing is ended. The AT mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the conditions for adding the number of AT mode games are met. Although the details will be described later, when the bonus ends in a situation where the AT mode addition flag is set, the AT mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus.

If it is determined in step S916 that the additional lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S923. In step S923, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. That is, if a specific role is won during the AT mode, and the lottery for transition to the VB mode or the lottery for the additional number of games in the AT mode is not won, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. In the specialized zone lottery process, a table for the lottery for transition to the specialized zone is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery is performed on whether or not the display mode is to be transitioned to the specialized zone by a lottery counter or the like. As shown in FIG. 38, the table for the lottery for transition to the specialized zone is set so that the probability of winning the lottery for transition varies depending on the type of transition trigger role among the specific roles. As already explained, the transition trigger role that overlaps with the bonus does not win the lottery for transition to the VB mode, while the overlapping role with the bonus is set so that the lottery for the lottery for the additional number of games in the AT mode is always won (100% probability of winning) as shown in FIG. 40. Therefore, the specialized zone transition lottery is not triggered by overlapping roles with these bonuses, and the specialized zone transition lottery is set up so that it can be won when a strong cherry or weak cherry, which is not an overlapping role with a bonus, is won, and the VB mode transition lottery and the game number addition lottery are not won. For example, there is a 5% chance of winning a specialized zone transition lottery based on a strong cherry, and a 0.5% chance of winning a specialized zone transition lottery based on a weak cherry. On the other hand, there is a 15% chance of winning a specialized zone transition lottery based on a strong watermelon, and a 5% chance of winning a specialized zone transition lottery based on a weak watermelon.

In step S924, it is determined whether or not the lottery for moving to the specialized zone has been won based on the processing result of step S923. If the lottery has been won, in step S925, a process is performed to set a specialized zone winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d. Then, in step S926, a process is performed to obtain a premonition game number table, in step S927, a process is performed to draw the premonition game number, in step S928, a process is performed to set the premonition game number, in step S929, a process is performed to set the premonition command, and then the second specific role processing is terminated. The processing of steps S926 to S929 is the same as the processing of steps S907 to S910, for example, and is processing for setting the premonition mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S924 and the lottery for transitioning to VB mode, the lottery for adding the number of games in AT mode, and the lottery for transitioning to the specialized zone are not won, then in step S930 the pseudo additional notification After performing the process, the second specific combination process is ended. The pseudo additional notification process is a process for sustaining expectations by generating a performance similar to when winning the lottery even if the lottery does not win.

<Third specific role processing>
Next, the third specific combination process executed in step S705 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The third special role processing corresponds to the AT mode or VB mode. In the third special role processing, a process for adding to the number of continued games in the AT mode and a lottery for transition to a specialized zone are performed.

That is, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not any bonus is being carried over, or whether or not any bonus state is being held. If it is in the carry-over state or the bonus state, the third specific role processing is terminated as is. That is, in this embodiment, during the bonus carry-over state or the bonus state, no AT mode addition lottery or the like is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S1101, the process proceeds to step S1102.

In step S1102, an AT mode game number addition lottery process is performed. This process is similar to the process in step S915. Note that the probability of winning the additional lottery may be different between the lottery process in step S915 and the lottery process in step S1102.

In step S1103, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S1102 is an additional winning result. If it is determined that the bonus lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1104 whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1105, and lottery processing for the number of additional games in AT mode is performed. Then, in step S1106, processing for adding the number of games in the AT mode is performed, processing for adding notification is performed in step S1107, and processing for setting the additional command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S1108. , this third specific combination processing ends. The processing from step S1104 to step S1108 is similar to the processing from step S917 to step S921. Note that the number of additional games may be different between the lottery process in step S917 and the lottery process in step S1105.

If the result of step S1103 is negative, the process proceeds to step S1110. In step S1110, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. That is, if a specific combination is won during VB mode, but the number of games added to the AT mode is not won, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is also executed. The lottery process for the specialized zone is the same as the process of step S923 above, and is executed based on a table for the lottery for transition to the specialized zone (FIG. 38). The processes of steps S1111 to S1117 are the same as the processes of steps S924 to S930 above. Furthermore, if the bonus win flag is determined to be set in step S1104, the AT mode add-on flag is set in step S1108, and the third specific combination process is terminated. The AT mode add-on flag is as described above.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). After executing any of the processes in step S702, step S704, and step S705, it is determined in step S706 whether the result of the current lottery process is a press order replay or a press order winning combination of the press order bell. . If the winning winning combination is determined by pressing the winning combination, the pressing winning combination process is executed in step S707. This push order processing will be explained in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S706, or after executing the process in step S707, the process advances to step S708. In step S708, it is determined whether a specialized zone flag corresponding to the additional specialized zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. As mentioned above, after the specialized zone winning flag is set based on winning the lottery for transition to SAT mode or the lottery for transition to specialized zone, the transition to the specialized zone occurs. This is a flag that is set when the seventh re-game winning is established. If the specialized zone flag is set in step S708, specialized zone processing is executed in step S709. If a negative determination is made in step S708, or after executing the process in step S709, the main lottery result corresponding process is ended.

<Specialized zone processing>
The specialized zone processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36.

In the specialized zone processing, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether any of the bonuses are being carried over or any of the bonuses are being carried over. If it is in a carryover state or a bonus state, the specialization zone processing ends immediately. That is, in this embodiment, during the bonus carryover state or the bonus state, an additional lottery etc. in the AT mode is not performed. If a negative determination is made in step S1201, the process advances to step S1202.

In step S1202, the result of the current lottery process is grasped. In the following step S1203, AT mode additional game number lottery processing is performed. In the subsequent step S1204, processing for adding the number of games in AT mode is performed. Then, in step S1205, additional notification processing is executed, and in step S1206, an additional command is set, and then the specialized zone processing is ended. The processing from step S1203 to step S1206 is similar to the processing from step S918 to step S921. However, the number of games to be selected is greater in the number of additional games lottery process in step S1203 than in the number of additional games lottery process in step S918 (FIG. 40). Furthermore, in the specialized zone, it is set so that the number of AT mode games is always increased regardless of the game result (FIG. 41).

As described above, in the lottery result handling process, the lottery to shift to CZ mode, AT mode, or VB mode, and the process to increase the number of consecutive games in CZ mode or AT mode, etc. are performed. If you win the lottery for transition to CZ mode, AT mode, or VB mode, you will be notified that you have won the lottery for transition after playing the precursor game. Therefore, the process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode shift lottery will be described below.

<Processing for transitioning the gaming state based on the display mode transition lottery result>
(2) In the process for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, there is a process for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won, and a notification for transitioning the gaming state. The processing to perform is performed. Therefore, first, a process related to notification of winning the transfer lottery will be explained.

<Mode transition notification process>
The notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode transition notification process is performed when a predetermined betting operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is the specified number). The mode transition notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S1301, it is determined whether the number of premonition games is 0. The number of premonition games is counted in the winning result response process described below, and the number of premonition games is decremented by 1 each time a game is played. If the number of premonition games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated.

If the number of portent games is 0, it is determined in step S1302 whether a bonus winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current omen mode is a omen mode triggered by a bonus win. If the bonus winning flag is set, a bonus winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1303, and then this mode transition notification processing is ended. The display control device 81 that has received the bonus winning notification command notifies that the bonus has been won by, for example, displaying "Bonus Confirmed!!" on the auxiliary display section 65. Note that the process related to notification that the bonus has been won will be explained in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1302, the process advances to step S1304. In step S1304, it is determined whether the CZ mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current precursor mode was a precursor mode triggered by winning the CZ mode. If the CZ mode winning flag is set, the CZ mode winning flag is cleared in step S1305. Then, in step S1306, a CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The CZ mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that the current display mode is the CZ mode. In step S1307, a CZ mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the CZ mode start command notifies the start of the CZ mode using the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. Such notification will be explained in detail later.

Thereafter, in step S1308, counting of the number of CZ mode continuations is started. Specifically, the initial value (20 in this embodiment) of the number of continuous games in the CZ mode is set in the CZ mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1308, this mode transition notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S1304 that the CZ mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1309 whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. In other words, it is determined whether or not the present premonition mode was a premonition mode triggered by the AT mode winning. If the AT mode winning flag is set, the AT mode winning flag is cleared in step S1310. Then, in step S1311, an AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The AT notification flag is a flag for transitioning the game state to the second RT state in association with the winning of the AT mode transition lottery. After that, in step S1312, an AT mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode winning notification command notifies the player that the AT mode transition lottery has been won by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1312, this mode transition notification process is terminated.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the aspect of winning notification in SAT mode is different from the aspect of winning notification in AT mode. Therefore, in step S1312, it is preferable to set the AT mode winning notification command to include information as to whether or not the SAT mode is selected. The winning notification mode in the AT mode and the winning notification mode in the SAT mode may be different enough to be distinguishable by the player, and more preferably, the winning notification mode in the SAT mode, which is more advantageous, is different from the winning notification mode in the SAT mode. It is preferable that the mode is more flashy than the mode of winning notification in AT mode.

Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the format of winning notification in AT mode and SAT mode is made common. By doing this, between the AT mode winning notification game and the start notification game, it is possible to make it appear as if the winning content has been promoted from AT mode to SAT mode, and the AT mode winning notification game It is possible to eliminate the delay caused by the difference between the game and the start notification game.

If it is determined in step S1309 that the AT mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1313 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether the current precursor mode was a precursor mode triggered by winning the VB mode. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1314. Then, in step S1315, a VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the third RT state in response to winning the VB mode shift lottery. Thereafter, in step S1316, a VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the VB mode winning notification command, uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the VB mode transition lottery. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After executing the process of step S1316, this mode transition notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S1313 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1317. In step S1317, it is determined whether the specialized zone winning flag is set. If it has not been set, the mode transition notification process ends. If it is set, in step S1318, processing is performed to clear the specialization zone winning flag. Then, in step S1319, processing is performed to set a specialized zone notification flag in the various flag storage areas 106d. The specialized zone notification flag is a flag for executing press order notification corresponding to the seventh re-game winning. After executing the process of step S1319, the specialized zone winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1320, and then this mode transition notification process is ended. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone winning notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to notify that the special zone has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S1317, the mode transition notification process is directly terminated.

That is, among the CZ mode, AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone, which are transitioned through the premonition mode, the CZ mode is started based on the betting operation when the premonition game number of the premonition mode becomes 0. On the other hand, for the AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone, only the notification that the AT mode transition lottery or the VB mode transition lottery has been won is made based on the betting operation when the premonition game number of the premonition mode becomes 0, and the AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone are not started even if the premonition game number becomes 0. This is due to the difference that the CZ mode as a display mode does not involve a transition of the game state, while the AT mode and VB mode involve a transition of the game state, specifically, the AT mode is started by transitioning to the second RT state, and the VB mode is started by transitioning to the third RT state. Note that there are also cases where the specialized zone does not involve a transition of the game state (third RT state → third RT state), but in this embodiment, the seventh replay winning game in the third RT state is set as the starting game, so the above processing configuration is adopted.

As already explained, the second RT state is entered when the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, and the third RT state is entered when the second promoted replays 1 and 2 are won. The process shifts to the case where the player wins, and the fourth and fifth re-game wins are established. Then, the case where the first promoted replay 1 to 4 is won and the third replay prize is established, or the case where the second promoted replay 1 and 2 is won and the fourth and fifth replay prize is established, This is a case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of these promotion replay wins corresponds to the third replay win, etc. Therefore, if you win the lottery to shift to AT mode or VB mode, then in the game in which you won the winning combination that will shift these gaming states, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 will be announced. The configuration allows the game state to be changed. Please note that from the time you are notified that you have won the transition lottery for AT mode or VB mode until the AT mode or VB mode starts (until the gaming state changes), you will not be notified as a preparation state (for example, " An announcement will be made that “Preparations are in progress”.

<Explanation regarding display mode transition>
The notification process for shifting the gaming state is performed in the push order process (step S707) in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to explaining the push order processing, an outline of the case where the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be explained with reference to FIG. 46.

<Summary of push order notification performance>
Notification of the operation order at the time of winning the push order combination (press order notification, push order notification effect, order notification, mode notification) is mainly performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the instruction monitor 68. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described using as an example a case where the push order combination is won when the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left. The press order notification on the instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays the button corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first among the three button displays arranged in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44 (in the figure, the middle stop The number 1 is added to the middle button (corresponding to the switch 43), and the button is displayed larger than the other button displays. Further, each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). Thereby, the player can recognize the winning combination in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. In addition, in the auxiliary display section 65, a number is displayed on the right button display to indicate that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44, and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. The number 2 is displayed and the number 3 is displayed on the left button display.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 46(b), the center button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 is displayed large. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 46(c), the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the left button display corresponding to the left stop switch 42 is displayed large. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

To explain the execution timing of the press order notification, the press order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R until the constant speed rotation after the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by having a configuration in which the press order notification is executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, it is possible to recognize the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and then press the stop switches 42 to 44. This allows the game to proceed at a good tempo.

<Push order processing>
Next, the push order role processing executed in step S707 in the lottery result response processing (Figure 31) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 47.

In step S1401, it is determined whether the current lottery result is any of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. A positive determination is made in step S1401 when the first replay or the third replay wins, depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1402, where it is determined whether an AT notification flag has been set in the various flags storage area 106d of RAM 106. As already explained, the AT notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of premonition games in the premonition mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery for transition to the AT mode in the mode transition notification process (Figure 45).

If the AT notification flag is set, in step S1403, a process for notifying the press order of the third replay is executed. Specifically, of the first re-game and the third re-game, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23(a)). Thereafter, in step S1404, a process is performed to set the press order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device, and then the main press order process is ended. The press order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on reception of the press order notification command will be described in detail later.

The case where the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning is notified in step S1403 is basically assumed to be after the lottery for transition to the AT mode is won, the premonition mode is passed, and the winning notification for the AT mode is made, but before the transition to the AT mode. That is, the lottery table in the second RT state and the third RT state does not allow the first promotion replays 1 to 4 to be won, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 can only be won in the first RT state. However, even during the AT mode, there are cases where the game state falls from the second RT state to the first RT state due to an incorrect operation, etc., and even in such a case, it is possible to quickly return to the second RT state by winning the first promotion replays 1 to 4.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the current lottery result is one of fall replays 1 to 3. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1405 is the case where the first replay or the second replay wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1406, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, in step S1407, a process for notifying the pressing order of the first replay is executed. Specifically, of the first re-game and the second re-game, the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1408, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended.

In this way, if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in a situation where the lottery for transition to the AT mode has been won, the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay win is notified, making it possible to transition the game state to the second RT state. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1402, the push order role processing ends without performing the process for the push order notification. Therefore, for example, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the first RT state without winning the AT mode, there are cases where the first replay win is achieved and cases where the third replay win is achieved.

In addition, if you win Fall Replay 1 to 3 in a situation where the AT notification flag is set, the gaming state will shift to the 1st RT state by notifying you of the operation order corresponding to the 1st replay winning. It is possible to prevent this from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1406, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the AT mode ends and the AT notification flag is cleared and the display mode shifts to normal mode, a second replay prize may be established by winning Fall Replays 1 to 3, and the RT state will transition from the second RT state or the third RT state to the first RT state.

Also, for example, in the first RT state, if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the AT mode, and the operation sequence happens to correspond to the third replay win and the third replay win is achieved (even if the state transitions to the second RT state), the second replay win may be achieved by winning the fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if the state transitions to the second RT state by chance without winning the AT mode, the state will then promptly transition to the first RT state.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1405, then in step S1409 it is determined whether the current lottery result is either the second promotion replay 1 or 2. A positive judgment in step S1409 is made when the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay wins depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1410 it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, then in step S1411 it is determined whether a VB notification flag or a specialized zone notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set in the mode transition notification process (Figure 45) when the number of premonition games in the premonition mode becomes 0 after winning the transition lottery to the VB mode. In addition, the specialized zone notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of premonition games in the premonition mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery for transitioning to the specialized zone in the mode transition notification process (Figure 45).

If the VB notification flag or the specialized zone notification flag is set, processing for the push order notification for the 4th replay or the 5th replay is executed in step S1412. Specifically, among the 1st replay, 4th replay, and 5th replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the 4th replay winning or the 5th replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1413, processing is performed to set the push order notification command, and then this push order role processing is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1410, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1411, the process for notifying the press order of the first replay is executed in step S1407, and the process for setting the press order notification command is performed in step S1408. The main push order processing ends. Therefore, if you win 2nd promotion replay 1 and 2 without winning VB mode or specialized zone, if you are in AT mode, the press order notification effect corresponding to the 1st replay winning will be performed, and AT If the mode is not in effect, the press order notification effect will not be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1409, it is determined in step S1414 whether or not the current lottery result is a BAR replay. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1414 is a case where any of the first re-game, third re-game, and sixth to eighth re-games wins depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1415, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1416 whether the specialized zone notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set and the specialized zone notification flag is set, in step S1417, processing for notification of the pressing order of the seventh regame is executed. Specifically, among the first re-game, third re-game, and sixth to eighth re-games, the operation order corresponding to the seventh re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23(c)). After that, in step S1418, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S1415, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1416, the process for notifying the press order of the third replay is executed in step S1403, and the process for setting the press order notification command is performed in step S1404. The main push order process ends. Therefore, if you win BAR replay without winning VB mode or specialized zone, if you are in AT mode, the press order notification effect corresponding to the 3rd replay winning will be performed and the transition to the 2nd RT state will occur. occurs, and unless the AT mode is in effect, the press order notification effect will not be performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1414, then in step S1419 it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a push order bell win. If a push order bell win is made, then in step S1420 it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in normal mode or CZ mode. If it is not in normal mode or CZ mode, then in step S1421 a push order notification process is executed to notify the operation sequence corresponding to the first minor win (see FIG. 19). Then, in step S1422 a process is executed to set a push order notification command, and then the main push order role process is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S1419 or a positive judgment is made in step S1420, the main push order role process is terminated without executing the push order notification process.

When the push order notification is to be executed at least a predetermined number of times (once) in CZ mode, it is preferable to determine in step S1420 whether the push order notification has been executed a predetermined number of times during the CZ mode. If the determination is negative, it is preferable to count the predetermined number of times and proceed to the process for the push order notification in step S1421.

In addition, if the push order bell is won when the AT notification flag is set (if a negative judgment is made in step S1420), and the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is advisable not to issue a push order notification corresponding to the first minor win. By doing so, the transition result will stop, and the gaming state will transition to the first RT state, that is, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 will then be won, allowing the gaming state to transition to the high RT state.

<Processing to shift the display mode based on winning results>
<Winning result processing>
Next, as a result of notifying to shift the gaming state as described above, a process will be described in which a winning combination corresponding to the shifting of the gaming state is won (3). This process is performed in the winning result corresponding process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). The winning result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48.

In step S1501, game number management processing is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the aforementioned precursor mode, the number of consecutive games in CZ mode, AT mode, VB mode, specialized zone, etc. are counted. In the following step S1502, post-ride notification processing is executed. The later loading notification process is a process for performing the later loading notification explained in FIG. Additional notification (post-add notification) corresponding to the post-add counter BG is executed on the condition that Then, the value corresponding to the executed additional notification is added to the display remaining number counter HG and subtracted from the post-add counter BG, and the post-add flag is cleared on the condition that the post-add counter BG is 0.

In the following step S1503, it is determined whether or not the current stop result indicates that the third re-game winning has been established. As described above, when the third replay winning is established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing is performed to shift the gaming state to the second RT state. In this case, in step S1504, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. The case where the AT notification flag is not set is the case where the third re-game winning is achieved without the conditions for transitioning to AT mode being satisfied, and in this case, without performing the process for starting AT mode, The winning result handling process is then terminated. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1505 whether the current display mode is the AT mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As described above, the AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode. Incidentally, as flags for specifying display modes, in addition to the AT mode flag, a CZ mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB/RB mode flag are provided. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode corresponding to a higher RT state than the AT mode (VB mode, additional specialization zone), the AT mode flag is set to the corresponding flag of that mode (VB mode flag, It is configured to coexist with the special zone flag). Therefore, for example, the case where it is determined that the AT mode flag is set in step S1505 includes not only the case where the AT mode is in effect but also the case where the case is in the VB mode and the case in the specialized zone. .

If the AT mode flag is set in step S1505, the display mode is already AT mode, so this winning result response process ends. On the other hand, if the AT mode flag is not set, processing to start the AT mode is performed in steps S1506 to S1509.

That is, in step S1506, the AT mode flag is set. In the following step S1507, an AT mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the AT mode start command, uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the AT mode will be started from the next game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. Thereafter, in step S1508, counting of the number of AT mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 50) of the number of consecutive AT mode games is set in the AT mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106.

After performing the process in step S1508, it is determined in step S1509 whether the specialized zone flag is set. An affirmative determination in step S1509 means that the AT mode won this time is the SAT mode, and in this case, after clearing the specialized zone winning flag in step S1510, The process advances to steps S1519 to S1521. The processing for starting the additional specialization zone will be explained later. If a negative determination is made in step S1509, the winning result handling process is immediately terminated.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the third re-game winning has not been established, the process advances to step S1511. In step S1511, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth re-game winnings have been established as a result of the current stop. As described above, when the fourth and fifth re-gaming wins are established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing is performed to shift the gaming state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1512, it is determined whether the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is not set, it means that the 4th and 5th re-game winnings are achieved without winning the VB mode transition lottery, and in this case, the VB mode start process is not performed. , and ends the winning result handling process. If the VB notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1513 whether the VB mode flag is set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already the VB mode, and therefore the main winning result handling process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1514 to S1516.

That is, in step S1514, a process is performed to set the VB mode flag. In this case, the AT mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because VB mode is a mode to which the mode is transitioned via AT mode, and after VB mode ends, the mode always transitions to AT mode.

Thereafter, in step S1515, a VB mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the VB mode start command, uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will be started from the next game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S1516, counting of the number of VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 25) of the number of consecutive games in the VB mode is set in a VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1516, the main prize winning result corresponding process ends.

If it is determined in step S1511 that the 4th and 5th replay wins have not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S1517. In step S1517, it is determined whether or not the 7th replay win has been achieved as a result of the current stop. In this embodiment, if the 7th replay win has been achieved, that is, if the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the right reel 32R, and the "black BAR" symbol stops on the combination line in the middle, the configuration is such that a transition to the added-on special zone occurs. Note that the 7th replay win is achieved when BAR Replay 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation sequence corresponding to the 7th replay win (Figure 23 (c)).

If the seventh replay win has been achieved, in step S1518, it is determined whether or not the notification flag for the specialized zone is set. If the notification flag for the specialized zone is set, processing for starting the specialized zone is performed in steps S1519 to S1521. As already explained, when starting the SAT mode, even if a positive determination is made in step S1509 and processing of step S1510 is performed, processing of steps S1519 to S1521 is also performed.

Specifically, in step S1519, a process is performed to set a specialized zone flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The specialized zone flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that it is the above-mentioned added specialized zone, and when the specialized zone flag is set, counting the number of continued games in the VB mode is stopped. In this case, the various flag storage area 106d may contain an AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag.

After that, in step S1520, the specialized zone start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the specialized zone start command, notifies the user, via the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, that the specialized zone will start from the next game. Such notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1521, counting the number of specialization zone continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (e.g., 5) for the number of specialization zone continuation games is set in the specialization zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1521 is performed, this winning result response processing is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S1517 or step S1518, the winning result response processing is terminated.

As mentioned above, in particular, based on the winning combination (3rd to 5th replay) corresponding to the transition of the gaming state to the 2nd RT state or the 3rd RT state, the RT state processing (FIG. 21) is separately performed. , performs processing to shift the display mode. This is to avoid AT mode, etc. being started based on a winning combination that corresponds to changing the gaming state, even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. It is.

In addition, when transitioning to a display mode, among those that involve transitioning to a gaming state, transition to a higher mode, that is, when transitioning from normal mode or CZ mode to AT mode, or from AT mode to VB mode, Alternatively, when transitioning from AT mode or VB mode to a specialized zone, the configuration is such that the transition is made based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of a transition to a lower mode, for example, when the game state is transitioned due to a second replay winning as a fall replay or a stoppage of the transition roll, the display mode is not transitioned. When moving to a lower mode, the gaming state is managed by winning results (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when transitioning to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the gaming state and the transition of the display mode are performed in different games.

<Game Number Management Processing>
The game number management process executed in step S1501 of the winning result corresponding process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 49. In the game number management process, the number of premonition games in the premonition mode is counted, and the number of continued games in the CZ mode, AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted, and when the number of continued games in these display modes becomes 0, a process for ending the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in this embodiment, each game can be performed with a bet number of 1 to 3, and in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the specific number is 3 bets. If it is not a 3 bet, the number of games management process is ended. That is, in a 1-bet or 2-bet game, the number of games in the precursor mode and the number of continuous games such as the CZ mode are not counted. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which counting is performed regardless of the number of bets.

If the current game is a 3-bet game, the process advances to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether the current display mode is CZ mode. If it is the CZ mode, the process advances to step S1603, executes the process for the CZ mode, and then ends the game number management process. In the CZ mode processing, processing is performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the CZ mode. The CZ mode processing will be described in detail later.

If it is determined in step S1602 that the mode is not CZ mode, the process proceeds to step S1604. In step S1604, it is determined whether or not the bonus win flag is set or whether the game is in a bonus state. If a positive determination is made in step S1604, the process clears the display mode flags, AT mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag in step S1605, and then the game number management process ends. In other words, if the bonus win flag is set or during a bonus, the number of games played in AT mode, etc. is not counted. Note that if any flag is not set in step S1605, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1605, while the AT mode flag, the VB mode flag, etc. are cleared, the AT notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the bonus ends, after going through a preparation state such as AT mode, these flags are used to notify the pressing order for shifting the gaming state, making it possible to return to the gaming state before the bonus. On the other hand, if a bonus is won during a specialized zone, the specialized zone is terminated by winning the bonus. Further, in step S1605, the AT mode winning flag and the like are not cleared. Therefore, if the player wins the AT mode or the like and the bonus at the same time, the winner will be notified based on these winning flags after the bonus ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1604, then in step S1606 it is judged whether the number of premonition games is 0. If it is not 0, then in step S1607 the number of premonition games is decremented by 1. If the number of premonition games is 0 in step S1606 (if not in premonition mode), or after the processing of step S1607 has been executed, then in steps S1608 to S1625 the number of continued games in each mode is counted.

That is, in step S1608, it is determined whether the current display mode is the AT mode. If it is the AT mode, the process advances to step S1609, and it is determined whether or not the specialized zone is in the AT mode. That is, when transitioning to a specialized zone at the start of AT mode like in SAT mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1609. If the game is in the specialized zone, a number of games management process for the specialized zone is performed in steps S1622 to S1625. These processes will be explained later.

If it is determined in step S1609 that the zone is not a specialized zone, the AT mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1610, thereby decrementing the number of games to be played in the AT mode. Then, in step S1611, it is determined whether the AT mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process ends. If it is 0, the AT mode flag is cleared in step S1612, and the AT notification flag is cleared in step S1613. After that, in step S1614, the AT mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode end command notifies the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like that the AT mode will end in this game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After the process of step S1614 has been performed, the game number management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1608 that the mode is not AT mode, the process advances to step S1615. In step S1615, it is determined whether the current display mode is VB mode. If the mode is VB mode, the process advances to step S1616, and it is determined whether the zone is an additional specialization zone. If it is not the special add-on zone, the VB mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1617, thereby decrementing the number of VB mode continuation games. Then, in step S1618, it is determined whether the VB mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of games management process is ended. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1619, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1620. Thereafter, in step S1621, a VB mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode end command notifies the end of the VB mode in the current game on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After performing the process of step S1621, the number of games management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1616 that the zone is an added specialized zone, the process proceeds to step S1622. As already explained, if it is determined in step S1609 that the zone is a specialized zone in AT mode, the process also proceeds to step S1622. In step S1622, the specialized zone continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby decrementing the number of games continued in the specialized zone. Then, in step S1623, it is determined whether the specialized zone continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is 0, in step S1624, the specialized zone flag is cleared, and in step S1625, the specialized zone end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone end command, a notification that the specialized zone will end in this game is made on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. As such a notification, for example, a notification of the total number of games in which the addition was successful in the current specialized zone is made. After the processing of step S1625 is performed, the game number management process is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S1615 or step S1623, the game count management process ends.

<Completion judgment process>
Next, as the process when the bonus ends, the end determination process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 50. As already explained, the end determination process is a process executed in step S618 in the bonus state process (FIG. 26). In the termination determination process, it is determined whether the bonus termination conditions are met or not, and if the bonus is to be terminated, a process for notifying the winning of AT mode, etc., which has been won in duplicate with the bonus, etc. is performed, and AT mode, which has been won in duplicate with the bonus, Perform processing to add on the number of games, etc.

That is, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination has been achieved. As already explained, during the bonus of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, the 1st combination of BBs is achieved with a high probability, and the 2nd combination of BBs and the 3rd combination of BBs are partially achieved (FIG. 27). When winning the 1st role in BB, the 1st minor role is mainly won and a predetermined number of medals (9 medals) are paid out, and the 2nd role in BB and the 3rd role in BB are played in the 9th replay or This is a replay of the 10th replay, and no medals are paid out even if a winning is achieved. In addition, during CB, no matter which one of the small and medium CB winning combinations is won, the first small winning combination is mainly achieved and a predetermined number (15 medals) of medals are paid out. Step S1701 is a process of determining whether or not a small winning combination that results in a medal payout has been established among the winning combinations during the bonus and CB.

If it is determined in step S1701 that a small winning combination has been achieved, the process of subtracting the payout amount for this game from the remaining payout amount is performed in step S1702. If the determination in step S1701 is negative, or after the process of step S1702 has been executed, the process of determining whether the remaining payout amount is 0 or not is performed in step S1703. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated. If it is 0, the bonus end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1704, and then in steps S1705 to S1719, processing for notifying a win in AT mode, etc., and processing for adding to the number of continued games in AT mode, etc. are performed.

That is, in step S1705, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. If the AT mode winning flag is set, a lottery process for the number of premonition games is performed in step S1706, the number of premonition games is set in step S1707, and a premonition command is set in step S1708. Incidentally, in this embodiment, in the lottery process for the number of premonition games in step S1706, a lottery is performed in which the number of premonition games is 0 with a 100% probability. That is, in step S1707, the number of premonition games is always set to 0 games, and a winning notification of the AT mode, etc. is made in the game following the bonus ending game. After the process of step S1708 is executed, the end determination process is terminated.

If the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1705, it is determined in step S1709 whether the CZ mode winning flag is set. If the CZ mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode in steps S1706 to S1708 is performed, and then the end determination process is ended. If the CZ mode winning flag is not set in step S1709, it is determined in step S1710 whether the VB mode winning flag is set. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the processing for the precursor mode in steps S1706 to S1708 is executed. That is, if the bonus ends in a situation where the player has won in the CZ mode or the VB mode as well, after the bonus ends, a precursor game is played and then the winning notification in the CZ mode or the VB mode is performed.

Note that if a positive judgment is made in step S1705, step S1709, or step S1710 and the AT mode winning flag, CZ mode winning flag, or VB mode winning flag is set, the bonus will end if the AT mode, CZ mode, etc., and the bonus are won simultaneously.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1710, proceed to step S1711. In step S1711, it is determined whether or not the AT mode addition flag is set. If the AT mode addition flag is set, a lottery process for the number of added games in AT mode is performed in step S1712, an addition game number adding process for AT mode is performed in step S1713, an addition notification process is performed in step S1714, and an addition command is set in step S1715. The processes in steps S1712 to S1715 are the same as the processes in steps S918 to S921.

After executing either step S1708 or step S1715, or after making a negative determination in step S1711, the process advances to step S1716. In step S1716, by determining whether the CZ mode flag is set, it is determined whether the CZ mode is still in effect at the end of the bonus state. Incidentally, in the number of games management process shown in FIG. 49, when a bonus is won, the AT mode flag and the VB mode flag are cleared, but the CZ mode flag is not cleared (step S1605). That is, if the bonus winning is in the CZ mode, the CZ mode can continue, and the CZ mode may continue even when the bonus ends.

If the CZ mode flag is set in step S1716, a process is executed in step S1717 to set the end CZ flag in the various flag storage area 106d. The end CZ flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the CZ mode continued until the end of the bonus. If a negative judgment is made in step S1716, or after the process of step S1717 is executed, this end judgment process is terminated.

As described above, on the main control device 101 side, (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, (3) winning results. As a result of each of the processes for transitioning the display mode based on the above, a push order notification effect is generated by the auxiliary display section 65, and the gaming state is also transitioned to follow the transition of the display mode, and further, It becomes possible to generate a press order bell prize by the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display section 65, and it becomes possible to expect to win a large amount of medals.

When a push order replay or push order bell is won, if a push order notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 (a push order notification effect by the display control device 81), in addition to the push order notification effect, a push order notification is also performed by the instruction monitor 68 connected to the main control device 101. The configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be explained with reference to Figure 51. Figure 51(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and Figure 51(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display content.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling on/off of these individual light sources, only one arbitrary display segment can be turned on. Any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the instruction monitor 68. Note that since all of the above-mentioned individual light sources emit light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

Regarding each of the display segments N1 to N8 in more detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are arranged so that they can at least display the numbers "1" to "6". The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged to the side of the lower right part of the area in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are arranged. Therefore, the indication monitor 68 can at least display "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that as long as it is possible to individually display multiple patterns of symbols on the instruction monitor 68, the shape and arrangement of each of the display segments N1 to N8 may be arbitrary. It is also possible to use a configuration using 1 segment, 9 segments, or the like. Furthermore, it is not essential that the colors displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and the configuration may be such that the colors displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, a configuration in which each display segment N1 to N8 is turned on or off by controlling the light source on and off is not essential, but if the display can be controlled individually in each display segment N1 to N8, A segment display may be configured with a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Furthermore, instead of applying segment display to each display area, symbols may be displayed using other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used to notify the operation order of the pressing combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 51(b), by performing the stop operations in the order of "left" → "middle" → "right" as the operation order of each stop switch 42 to 44, a winning mode advantageous to the player can be achieved. If so, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and "1" is displayed. Furthermore, if the winning mode is advantageous to the player by performing the stop operations in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the operation order of each stop switch 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit to display "5". In other words, the numbers (symbols) displayed in each display segment N1 to N7 have a one-to-one correspondence with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in display segments N1 to N7. By operating the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win a prize in a manner advantageous to the player.

The 8th display segment N8 is a bonus that can be displayed when the display mode is normal mode and the lottery to switch to AT mode, SAT mode, or CZ mode is won, or when the AT mode, SAT mode, or CZ mode can be won at the same time. It lights up when you win (1st BB). Further, the light is turned off when the AT mode, SAT mode, CZ mode, or the first BB ends and the mode is transferred to the normal mode (excluding the case where the mode is transferred to the AT mode again after going through the precursor mode, etc.).

In other words, navigation states (AT mode, SAT mode, high-frequency mode) that make it easier for players to win prizes in an advantageous manner by making it easier to be notified of the order of operations for push order bells and push order replays, A chance state where it is easier to win the transition lottery (CZ mode, 1st BB, high probability mode), or a winning state where you have won the transition lottery to the navigation state or chance state but have not transitioned to the navigation state or chance state. (winning mode) is set as an advantageous section (specific gaming state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 lights up during the advantageous section and turns off during the normal section that is not an advantageous section. This serves as a section indicator (specific notification means) to clearly indicate whether or not it is a section.

The eighth display segment N8 is a starting game in which a game result (such as a specific combination such as strong cherry) that triggered an advantageous section such as a navigation state, a chance state, or a winning state is won and the game result is established. Then, at a timing before the game operation by the player is permitted in the game following the starting game, the lighting is started as a notification of the advantageous period. More specifically, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the game result winning that triggered the advantageous section is realized, that is, regardless of whether there is a loss or not, the game in which the game result was won is played. The eighth display segment N8 is turned on at a timing before a bet operation is permitted as a game operation by a player in the next game as a starting game. In other words, the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting up before the start of the game following the game in which the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is won.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is disposed near the side of the payout number display unit 62 on the gaming panel 25. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is disposed above the stop switches 42 to 44 etc. operated by the player, in other words, it is not disposed on the decorative panel, which is the front part of the gaming machine, below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 etc. are provided. Therefore, the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand etc. operating the stop switches 42 to 44 etc., and it can be said that it is disposed in a position where it is easily visible to the player. In addition, since it is disposed near the payout number display unit 62 where the player who is playing the game aiming to win medals can easily focus on it, it can be said that the player is prevented from overlooking it.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than that of the surrounding display parts (for example, the payout number display part 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice that of the surrounding display section. Therefore, even if the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display sections are both controlled to emit light (lighted up), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine, the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine is higher for the eighth display segment N8 than for the surrounding display sections (more specifically, the illuminance for the eighth display segment N8 is higher than that of the surrounding display sections). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is twice as high. Such a configuration also improves the visibility of the eighth display segment N8, and prevents it from being overlooked when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lit state.

Below, we will explain the section display process 1 and section display process 2 as processes related to turning on/off the eighth display segment N8.

<Section display first process>
First, the first section display process will be explained with reference to FIG. 52. The first section display process is a process performed in step S316 in the lottery process (FIG. 16), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the lottery result. This is carried out after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1801, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, when the eighth display segment N8 is being lit, this indicates a state in which the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous zone AT mode, SAT mode, or CZ mode has been won, or when the player is in these modes. If a negative determination is made in step S1801 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1802.

In step S1802, it is determined whether either the CZ mode winning flag or the AT mode winning flag is set. If the 8th display segment N8 is off and either the CZ mode winning flag or the AT mode winning flag is set, this means that in the current lottery process, there will be no transition to CZ mode or AT mode. This is the case where the player wins the lottery for switching to SAT mode. As already explained, in the first specific combination processing (Fig. 32), if the lottery to shift to CZ mode is won, the CZ mode winning flag is set, and if the lottery to shift to AT mode or SAT mode is won, the CZ mode winning flag is set. , the AT mode winning flag is set. In step S1802, if none of the flags is set, the first section display process is ended.

If either the CZ mode winning flag or the AT mode winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1803, where the display of the section indicator is started by lighting the eighth display segment N8. In addition, when the main control unit 101 starts displaying the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator with the lighting state, it outputs a command for sound output to the display control unit 81 so that a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound such as "Gago!") is output from the speaker 64. The display control unit 81 controls the speaker 64 so that the predetermined sound effect is generated based on the command for sound output. Note that when the display of the eighth display segment N8 starts, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is generated in the auxiliary display unit 65 or another display unit. In this case, a corresponding command may be output to the display control unit 81, and the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. may be controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed by the display control unit 81.

After executing the process in step S1803, in step S1804, a process to start measuring the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section is executed, and then the first section display process is ended. The number of consecutive games in the advantageous section is determined by measuring the number of advantageous section games AG provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and in step S1804, the process sets the number of games AG in the advantageous section to an initial value of 0. I do. The number of games in the advantageous section AG is incremented by 1 for each game in the advantageous section.

If it is determined in step S1801 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed as a section indicator, then in step S1805, processing is performed to continue the display during the favorable section, and then this section display first processing is terminated. Specifically, in step S1805, processing is performed to continue the situation in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit. In other words, processing to end the display of the section indicator is not performed in this section display first processing.

<Second section display process>
Next, the second section display process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53. As already explained, the second section display process is a process executed in step S415 of the reel control process, and upon the end of one game, the payout of medals (payout determination process) and the transition of the gaming state based on the winning results are performed. etc. (winning result corresponding processing) is carried out.

In step S1901, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 is lit as a zone indicator. If it is off (not lit, not displayed), the second zone display process is terminated. If it is lit, the process proceeds to step S1902. In step S1902, a process is executed to count the number of games in the favorable zone. Specifically, a process is executed to add 1 to the favorable zone game number AG. The favorable zone game number AG is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the favorable zone, and the number of games played while the eighth display segment N8 is lit is measured. After executing the process of step S1902, in step S1903, a remaining game number management process is executed. The remaining game number management process is a process for managing whether the favorable zone is in a situation where the upper limit number of games is reached with the current remaining number of games, based on the remaining number of games in the AT mode, etc.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 54, first, in step S2001, the number G1 of precursor games is determined. The number of portent games G1 represents the remaining number of games in the portent mode when the current situation is in the portent mode in an advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). . In step S2002, the number of CZ mode continuations G2 is determined. For example, when the current CZ mode is in an advantageous section, the CZ mode continuation number G2 represents the number of remaining CZ mode games, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). . Note that in this embodiment, the number of CZ mode continuations may change after the fact, and the CZ mode continuation number G2 represents the final number of remaining games. In step S2003, the AT mode continuation number G3 is determined. For example, when the current AT mode is in an advantageous section, the AT mode continuation number G3 represents the number of remaining AT mode games, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). . In step S2004, the number of VB mode continuations G4 is determined. For example, when the current VB mode is in an advantageous section, the VB mode continuation number G4 represents the number of remaining VB mode games, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). . In step S2005, the number of continued specialized zones G5 is determined. For example, if the current specialized zone is in an advantageous zone, the number of continued specialized zones G5 represents the number of remaining specialized zone games, and is set by 1 for each game in the game number management process (Figure 49). Subtracted. In step S2006, the number of remaining BB/RB games G6 is determined. The remaining number of BB/RB games G6 represents the remaining number of games in the BB/RB mode when the current situation is the BB/RB mode (bonus state) in an advantageous section, and the number of games management process (FIG. 49) Each time it is activated, it is subtracted by 1 in a subtraction process (not shown) provided that it is in the BB/RB mode.

Here, for these continuation numbers G1 to G6, a value of 0 or more may be input even if the current mode or zone is not the corresponding one. Specifically, for example, in VB mode, specialized zone, or BB/RB mode, the count of remaining games in AT mode is stopped; When a shift to the RB mode occurs, a value of 0 or more is input to the AT mode continuation number G3 and the continuation number of each of these modes.

In step S2007, the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous zone is calculated by accumulating G1 to G6 determined in each of the processes in steps S2001 to S2006. By performing this process, it is possible to determine how many more games the advantageous zone will continue. In the following step S2008, the total number of games in the advantageous zone SG is calculated by adding the number of games in the advantageous zone that have been played so far (number of games in the advantageous zone AG) and the remaining number of games ZG. Then, in step S2009, the total number of games in the advantageous zone SG is subtracted from 1500G, which is the upper limit number of games that the advantageous zone can continue, to calculate the number of free games FG (number of free games that can be added, number of remaining games).

After performing the process in step S2009, it is determined in step S2010 whether the number of free games FG is greater than 0, that is, whether there is a number of free games and it is possible to add more. If the number of free games FG is greater than 0, the remaining game number management process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the number of free games FG is 0 or less, in step S2011 a process is executed to set an excess flag in the various flag storage areas 106d, and then the remaining game number management process is ended. The CPU 102 understands that the excess flag indicates a situation in which it is not possible to add on the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section, or more specifically, a situation where even if the number of games is added, the additional games will not be played due to forced termination at the 1500th game. This is a flag for

In this embodiment, by setting the excess flag, even if a specific role is won during the favorable zone, the implementation of the lottery for adding the number of games during the AT mode is restricted. More specifically, for example, if the excess flag is set in the lottery process for adding the number of games in the AT mode, such as step S914 or step S1101, the implementation of such lottery process is restricted, and the addition will not be won (or even if it is won, an addition of 0 games will occur). This makes it possible to prevent the addition of an amount that cannot be continued, which can lead to the misunderstanding that the favorable zone will continue beyond the upper limit number of games.

In addition, once the excess flag is set, the remaining game number management process may not be performed during the current advantageous period.

Returning to the explanation of the second interval display process (FIG. 53), after executing the process of step S1903, in step S1904 it is determined whether the number of games in the favorable interval AG in the current game has reached the upper limit of "1500". If it has reached "1500", in step S1905 the number of games in the favorable interval AG is cleared to 0, and then in step S1906 a process is performed to turn off the eighth display segment N8 as a process to end the display of the interval display. Then in step S1907 a data initialization process is performed, and then the second interval display process is ended.

The data initialization process is a process of returning the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section to their initial values. For example, the CZ mode winning flag, AT mode winning flag, etc. may be set when moving to an advantageous section, or the VB mode winning flag may be set during AT mode, and the flag may remain set until this initialization process. If so, clear these winning flags. Furthermore, in the initialization process, if the AT notification flag, AT mode flag, VB mode flag, specialized zone flag, etc. are set, these flags are also cleared. Further, if a precursor counter, a counter for the number of continuous games such as AT mode, etc. is larger than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters that affect the performance related to press order notification regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using press order notification, and clears the RAM with respect to such variables and parameters. This is a process that performs

If it is determined in step S1904 that the number of games AG in the advantageous period has not reached the upper limit value, the process advances to step S1908, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous period has ended. That is, in step S1908, it is determined whether or not neither the CZ mode winning flag nor the AT mode winning flag is set, and in step S1909, it is determined whether neither the CZ mode flag nor the AT mode flag is set. Determine whether the state is the same or not. An affirmative determination in both step S1908 and step S1909 means that the advantageous section ends before reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section.In this case, the process advances to step S1905, and the number of games AG in the advantageous section is determined. It is cleared to 0, and in step S1906, the section display end process is performed, and in step S1907, data initialization process is performed, and then the second section display process is ended. If a negative determination is made in either step S1908 or step S1909, it is determined that the vehicle is still in an advantageous zone, and the second zone display process is ended. In this case, the lighting display of the section indicator (eighth display segment N8) continues.

<About the push order indicator and section indicator displays and game progress>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous zone and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator will be explained with reference to Figure 55.

In the present slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 55, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is off (not lit) in a normal section that is not an advantageous section. In this normal section, the press order notification effect is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have the performance related to the instruction function, as opposed to the advantageous section that has the performance related to the instruction function such as pressing order notification. A situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, if you win a lottery to move to an advantageous section such as CZ mode or AT mode by winning a weak watermelon combination, the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established will be the starting game, and the starting game will be At a timing before the bet operation by the player is permitted in the next game, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator lights up, and notification of the advantageous section is started.

In this case, in the game in which the weak watermelon role is won as described above, the game is in the state before the transition to the advantageous zone, and is included in the normal zone. If we consider the eighth display segment N8, which serves as a zone indicator indicating the advantageous zone, to be notified at the timing when betting operations are permitted for the game following the starting game in which the weak watermelon role was won, that is, at the timing when the game in which the advantageous zone begins becomes playable, then, as described above, the notification of the eighth display segment N8 being lit in the game in which the weak watermelon role was won (starting game) can be said to be an advance notification that is made before the notification of the advantageous zone (state notification, mode notification).

Thereafter, in a situation where an advantageous section is being notified, press order notification using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is generated. In this case, as described above, the press order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7, and the player presses the button based on the press order information. Be able to understand the order. In the press order notification, the display of the press order information starts when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If such a game is not the last game in the advantageous section, when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, only the display of the push order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends, and the eighth display The display of the advantageous section by segment N8 continues. If the player wins the push order combination again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to the push order combination is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit, etc., and it becomes the final game of the advantageous zone, the eighth display segment N8 also goes out and the notification of the advantageous zone ends. The number of games in the advantageous zone is counted in the games in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit; specifically, the game following the start game is counted as the first game, and the number of games in the advantageous zone is up to the final game in which the eighth display segment N8 goes out.

In the present embodiment, in the final game of the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the medal payout is finished (by the section display second process which is the process after the payout determination process). Note that if medals are not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game is the final game in the advantageous section.

In this way, the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the advantageous zone is reached, and goes out when the advantageous zone ends. The eighth display segment N8 not only starts to light up when a mode is transitioned to CZ mode, AT mode, etc., but also starts to light up when a lottery for transitioning to CZ mode, AT mode, etc. is won. In other words, even if a notification is not given in a game in which a lottery for transitioning to these modes is won, by checking whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is lit, it is possible to clearly understand whether or not a transition lottery has been won. In this way, it is possible to prevent a difference in the degree of advantage between a player who has won a lottery for transitioning to these modes but quits the game without knowing it, and a successor player who sits down after him.

In addition, the slot machine 10 is configured so that there is no difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value for the playability that changes depending on the push order notification in the CZ mode, AT mode, etc. Therefore, by making the playability based on the push order notification a uniform degree of advantage for each gaming machine (setting value) and each game (situation), it is possible to eliminate advantages/disadvantages between players, while still being able to fully enjoy the original playability of the slot machine 10, which is to aim for pictures to obtain bonuses, and to create a well-balanced gaming machine in relation to the playability based on the accompanying push order notification.

<Processing related to notification performance on the sub side>
Next, as (4) processing related to notification performance on the sub side, various notification processing performed by the sub side display control device 81 will be described. As the processing for various notifications, a performance setting process executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. The performance setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the performance setting process, first in step S2101, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S2102, a process is executed to store the received command in RAM 183. A command storage area is provided in RAM 183, and this command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out previously stored commands.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2101, or after the processing of step S2102 is executed, in step S2103, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is a bet command. A bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on a bet operation being performed, and includes the bet command set in step S207 of the normal processing, as well as the CZ mode start command in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 45), the AT mode winning notification command, the VB mode winning notification command, the bonus winning notification command, and the like. If it is one of these bet commands, in step S2104, the bet performance setting processing is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, or after executing the process in step S2104, it is determined in step S2105 whether the newly received command is a start command. The start command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and includes the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery process, as well as the first to There are precursor commands and additional commands set in the third specific combination processing (FIGS. 32 to 35), push order notification commands set in the push order processing (FIG. 47), and the like. If it is one of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S2106.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2105, or after the processing of step S2106 is executed, in step S2107, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a stop command command set in step S405 of the reel control processing (FIG. 18). If the stop command is a stop command at each stop operation, in step S2108, a process for setting the performance at each stop operation is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2107, or after the processing of step S2108 is executed, in step S2109, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is an all stop command. An all stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and includes the winning result command set in step S411 of the reel control processing (Figure 18), as well as the AT mode start command, VB mode start command, and specialized zone start command set in the winning result response processing (Figure 48). If it is one of these all stop commands, in step S2110, the all stop performance setting processing is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2109, or after executing the process in step S2110, other processes are executed in step S2111, and then the effect setting process is ended. In step S2111, effects are set based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59), and connections are made without going through the main controller 101. Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), settings for effects, settings for error notification, etc. are performed.

Below, we will explain the bet time effect setting process, start time effect setting process, each stop operation effect setting process, and all stop time effect setting process. Note that when explaining each effect setting process, we will refer to the overview diagrams of the display effects in Figures 66 to 72.

<Bet time performance setting process>
The bet time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2201, it is determined whether the bet time command received this time includes a CZ mode start command. If a CZ mode start command is included, in step S2202, processing is performed to set the CZ mode start effect. In the CZ mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Chance Zone Start" and displays (for example, a specified character display) indicating that the display mode to be transitioned to is in a situation where it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery. In addition, in the CZ mode start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a man's rough voice saying "It's your chance!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the CZ mode start command is not included in step S2201, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the AT mode winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. If the AT mode winning notification command is included, in step S2204, processing for setting an AT mode winning notification effect is performed. In the AT mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the characters "AT confirmed" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the AT mode winning notification performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "I did it!" in a high-pitched female voice).

If the AT mode winning notification command is not included in step S2203, it is determined in step S2205 whether or not the VB mode winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. If the VB mode winning notification command is included, processing for setting a VB mode winning notification effect is performed in step S2206. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(b), the characters "V-BONUS confirmed" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the VB mode winning notification performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Super lucky!" in male and female voices).

If the VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S2205, it is determined in step S2207 whether or not the currently received bet time command includes a bonus winning notification command. If the bonus winning notification command is included, in step S2208, processing is performed to set up a bonus winning notification effect. In the bonus winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "BONUS CONFIRMED." In addition, in the bonus winning notification effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male and female voice saying "Yay!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

In this embodiment, in certain cases, a special effect may occur during the bonus winning notification effect. This configuration will be explained in detail later.

If the bonus winning notification command is not included in step S2207, it is determined in step S2209 whether or not the currently received bet time command includes a specialized zone winning notification command. If the specialized zone winning notification command is included, in step S2210, processing for setting a specialized zone winning notification effect is performed. In the specialized zone winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the words "Get on it!". In addition, in the special zone winning notification production, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Norinori!" in the deep voice of an ecstatic man).

After executing any of the processes in steps S2202, S2204, S2206, S2208, and S2210, or if a negative judgment is made in step S2209, in step S2211, it is judged whether or not a winning postponement flag is set in the various flags storage area 183a. In this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is met, it may be a situation in which a predetermined bonus winning should be postponed, and the winning postponement flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to grasp that the situation requires such postponement. If the winning postponement flag is set, a special notification process is executed in step S2212. The special notification process will be explained later together with a detailed explanation of the winning postponement flag.

If a negative determination is made in step S2211, or after executing the process in step S2212, other bet effects are set in step S2213, and then the main effect setting process is ended. In the process of step S2213, for example, in response to the receipt of a bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit input switches 56 to 58 for the corresponding number of bets are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. For example, a process for returning from the demo mode where one condition is that no game has been played for a predetermined period of time, and a lamp around the start lever 41 is lit to notify that the operation has become effective. Perform processing, etc.

<Start production setting process>
Next, the start effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 58.

In step S2301, a display mode setting process is performed. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main control device 101 side is normal mode, CZ mode, AT mode, VB mode, or specialized zone, and the display performance of the auxiliary display unit 65 is set in the corresponding display mode. Specifically, the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side also has an area for setting a CZ mode flag, an AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag as flags for grasping the display mode, and the corresponding flag is set when each mode starts and cleared when it ends. For example, in the setting process for the CZ mode start performance in step S2202 above, the CZ mode flag is set. In step S2301, by grasping these various mode corresponding flags, the current display mode is identified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, the upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding performance is performed.

In the next step S2302, it is determined whether the lottery result of the game to be started is a winning push order role based on the received lottery result command. If the winning push order role is a winning push order role, in step S2303, a push order notification process is performed. Here, the push order notification process is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 59.

In step S2401, it is determined whether the currently received start command includes a push order notification command. If the push order notification command is not included, the push order notification process is terminated. If the push order notification command is included, the process proceeds to step S2402.

In step S2402, it is determined whether the current lottery result is the first promotion replay 1 to 4. If it is the first promotion replay 1 to 4, in step S2403, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the push order that will result in the third replay win, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2402 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not the winning combination, then in step S2404 it is determined whether the current lottery result is fall replays 1 to 3. If it is fall replays 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2405, where the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the player of the push order that will result in the first replay winning combination, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2404 that the result is not one of fall replays 1 to 3, then in step S2406 it is determined whether the current lottery result is second promotion replays 1 and 2. If it is second promotion replays 1 and 2, then in step S2407 it is determined whether a VB mode winning notification effect or a specialized zone winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S2206 or the specialized zone winning notification effect in step S2210, a notification flag indicating that a VB win or specialized zone win has been notified is set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. The notification flag is cleared upon transition to VB mode or specialized zone. Then, in step S2407, it is preferable to determine whether or not the notification flag exists. If a win has already been notified in VB mode or the specialized zone, in step S2408, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the push order for the fourth and fifth replay wins, and then the push order notification process ends. If a win has not yet been notified in VB mode or the specialized zone, the process proceeds to step S2405, where a push order notification for the first replay win is performed, and then the push order notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S2406 that the result is not the second promotion replay 1 or 2, then in step S2409 it is determined whether the current lottery result is a BAR replay. If it is a BAR replay, then in step S2410 it is determined whether the specialized zone winning notification performance has been executed. If the specialized zone winning notification has been executed, then in step S2411 the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to perform a push order notification for the seventh replay win, and then the push order notification processing is terminated. If the specialized zone winning notification has not been executed, then the process proceeds to step S2403 above, where a push order notification for the third replay win is executed, and then the push order notification processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2409 that it is not a BAR replay, it is determined in step S2412 whether or not the current lottery result is a bell. If it is a bell win, in step S2413, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. are controlled to notify the push order that the bell win is established as the first minor role, and then the push order notification process is ended. . If a negative determination is made in step S2412, the press order notification process is directly terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the start-time performance setting process (FIG. 58), if it is determined in step S2302 that the push order role has not been won, it is determined in step S2304 whether or not the transition trigger role has been won. If the transition trigger role has been won, processing for notifying the transition trigger role is performed in step S2305. The processing for notifying the transition trigger role will be explained in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2304, or after executing the process in step S2303 or step S2305, the process advances to step S2306. In step S2306, it is determined whether an additional command has been received as the current start command. If the add-on command has been received, in step S2307, processing is performed to set the add-on effect in advance so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed when the game is stopped. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66, a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the additional performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "squeaky squeakyyyy!").

Details of the additional effect setting process in step S2307 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 60.

In step S2501, a process is performed to determine the number of added games to be notified based on the currently received added command. In the following step S2502, a process is performed to determine the notification timing. The notification timing is the timing at which the added performance is executed, and this timing is determined by the processing on the main control device 101 side (the processing for the added performance notification). Information on the determined timing is set in the added command and output. Therefore, the display control device 81 side can determine the timing at which the added performance should be executed by reading the added command. The notification timing is set to the game at which the added performance should be executed, and the timing corresponding to the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44.

After the notification timing is determined in step S2502, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the result of determination in step S2502 is that an additional effect will be performed in the current game. The case where additional notification is not performed in the current game is the case where post-addition notification is selected, and in this case, the additional effect setting process is directly ended. If the current game is to perform an additional effect, it is determined in step S2504 whether or not the execution timing of the additional effect in the current game is when any of the reels is stopped. If it is the stop ON time, in step S2505, a target reel for generating an additional effect is set, and the additional effect is set to occur when the stop ON operation of the target reel is performed. Specifically, processing is performed to set any one of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage areas 183a. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing at which the additional effect occurs. Further, in step S2505, the performance data of the additional performance corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated at the time of the stop ON operation is read from the performance data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined performance data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 recognizes that an additional performance will occur at a timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 181 reads out the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area and causes the additional performance to be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2504, it is determined in step S2506 whether or not the first reel or the second reel is being operated to stop or turn OFF. If it is the time of the stop OFF operation of these reels, in step S2507, a target reel for generating an additional effect is set, and the additional effect is set to occur at the time of the stop OFF operation of the target reel. Specifically, processing is performed to set either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage areas 183a. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of occurrence of additional effects. Also, in step S2507, processing is performed to read performance data of an additional performance corresponding to the number of additional games from the performance data storage area 182b, and temporarily store the data in a predetermined performance data setting area.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2506, in step S2508, the current additional effect is set to occur when all reels are stopped (when the third reel is turned OFF). Specifically, a process is performed to set a flag when the third reel is turned OFF in the various flag storage area 183a. Also in step S2508, a temporary storage process is performed for the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games. After the process of step S2505, step S2507, or step S2508 is executed, the process of setting the additional effect is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the start-up effect setting process, if no top-up command is received in step S2306, or after the process of step S2307 is executed, the bonus effect setting process is executed in step S2308, the continuous effect setting process is executed in step S2309, and then other start-up effects are set in step S2310, after which the start-up effect setting process ends. The bonus effect setting process and the continuous effect setting process will be explained in detail later. The process of step S2310 performs, for example, a process of setting an effect suggesting the lottery result in response to the start of the game, or turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<Performance setting process at each stop operation>
Next, the process of setting the effects to be performed at each stop operation performed in step S2108 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2601, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. A stop ON operation command is a command that is output from the main control device 101 when the stop switch 42 to 44 is pressed during the stop operation of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, the process advances to step S2602, and it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned ON is set as the effect for the current game. If it has not been set, this setting process ends. If set, in step S2603, it is determined whether the stop ON operation command received this time is for a reel stop operation that is the target of the set performance during the stop ON operation. If it is not a stop ON operation for the target reel, this setting process is directly ended. If it is a stop ON operation for the target reel, in step S2604, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so that an effect is performed at the time of the stop ON operation, and then this setting process is ended.

For example, if an additional performance is set as the performance at the time of the current stop ON operation, as shown in FIG. 66(a), an additional performance occurs on the auxiliary display unit 65 at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed (ON operation). In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional performance is also emitted from the speaker 64.

Also, for example, if the current game is a push order role win and the push order notification effect is set, the push order notification effect will change to an effect indicating the reel to be operated next by stopping the corresponding reel based on each stop ON operation. Specifically, if all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning before the stop ON operation effect, a display indicating the first reel to be operated as shown in FIG. 46(a) is displayed. Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) stops due to the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the effect changes to an effect indicating the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure) as shown in FIG. 46(b). Also, if two reels are spinning before the stop ON operation effect, a display indicating the second reel to be stopped as shown in FIG. 46(b) is displayed, and based on the second reel stopping due to the stop ON operation, the display changes to an effect indicating the third reel to be stopped (FIG. 46(c)).

If the determination in step S2601 is negative, the process proceeds to step S2605, where it is determined whether the stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. A stop OFF operation command is a command that is output from the main control device 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, which is one of the stop operations for each reel, is completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, the process advances to step S2606, and it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned OFF is set as an effect for the current game. If it has not been set, this setting process ends. If it has been set, it is determined in step S2607 whether the stop OFF operation command received this time is for a reel stop operation that is the target of the set effect during the stop OFF operation. If the operation is not to stop or turn off the target reel, this setting process is immediately terminated. If it is a stop OFF operation for the target reel, in step S2608, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that a stop OFF operation effect is performed, and then this setting process is ended.

For example, if an additional effect is set as the effect at the time of the current stop OFF operation, as shown in FIG. 66(b), when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is terminated and the hand is released from the stop switch 42 to 44, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64. If a negative judgment is made in step S2605, this effect setting process is terminated.

<Processing for setting effects when fully stopped>
Next, the full stop effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 62.

First, in step S2701, it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a CZ mode end command. If a CZ mode end command is included, in step S2702, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that a CZ mode end effect is performed. In the CZ mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Chance Zone Ended." In addition, in the CZ mode end effect, control is performed so that a sound effect corresponding to the end of CZ mode (for example, a man's rough voice saying "Put yourself together!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the CZ mode end command is not included in step S2701, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not the currently received stop command includes an AT mode start command. If an AT mode start command is included, processing for setting an AT mode start effect is performed in step S2704. In the AT mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(a), the characters "AT start!! LV.1" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the AT mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Let's go!" in a high-pitched female voice).

Incidentally, the "LV.1" display during the AT mode start effect corresponds to the AT mode level. In other words, it is a display indicating that the AT mode being started this time is ATLV.1 mode. Then, when the AT mode level is promoted to ATLV.2 mode (when a promotion command is received), the characters "LV.2" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as a promotion effect. When the AT mode level is promoted to ATLV.3 mode, the characters "LV.3" are displayed, and when it is promoted to ATLV.4 mode, the characters "LV.4" are displayed.

If the AT mode start command is not included in step S2703, it is determined in step S2705 whether the currently received stop command includes an AT mode end command. If an AT mode end command is included, processing for setting an AT mode end effect is performed in step S2706. In the AT mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the characters "AT END" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the current AT mode (including VB mode and specialized zone) is displayed. It also displays the total number of coins paid out in the current AT mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the AT mode end production, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "See you again" in a high-pitched female voice).

If the AT mode end command is not included in step S2705, it is determined in step S2707 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a VB mode start command. If a VB mode start command is included, processing for setting a VB mode start effect is performed in step S2708. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the characters "777 Lucky!!" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the VB mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, ``Bonus Start!!'' in male and female voices).

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2707, it is determined in step S2709 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a VB mode end command. If a VB mode end command is included, processing for setting a VB mode end effect is performed in step S2710. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(b), the characters "V-BONUS END" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the AT mode continuation game at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. Displays the number of consecutive games (including VB mode and specialized zone), and also displays the total number of coins paid out in AT mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus) at the end of the current VB mode. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "It's still going on" in male and female voices).

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2709, then in step S2711 it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone start command. If the specialized zone start command is included, then in step S2712 a process is performed to set the specialized zone start effect. In the specialized zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Add-on challenge!!" and also displays a character indicating that this is a special mode in which AT mode add-ons are likely to occur. In addition, in the specialized zone start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a boy's voice saying "Let's go").

If the specialized zone start command is not included in step S2711, it is determined in step S2713 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone end command. If the specialized zone end command is included, in step S2714, processing for setting a specialized zone end effect is performed. In the specialized zone end effect, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the total number of games added in the current specialized zone. In addition, in the specialized zone end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "Kyukyukyukyu!"). Note that it is preferable to vary the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker 64 depending on the total number of additional games.

If the specialized zone end command is not included in step S2713, it is determined in step S2715 whether the currently received stop command includes a bonus end command. If the bonus end command is included, processing is performed in step S2716 to set the bonus end effect. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of coins paid out during the current bonus, and if the bonus was entered into AT mode, VB mode, or a specialized zone, the total number of coins paid out in AT mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus) is displayed. In addition, in the bonus end effect, depending on whether the AT mode was successful, whether the CZ mode was successful, and the number of added games, characters or the like are used to suggest these contents.

After executing any of the processes in step S2702, step S2704, step S2706, step S2708, step S2710, step S2712, step S2714, and step S2716, or after making a negative determination in step S2715, the process advances to step S2717. In step S2717, if an additional effect is set, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled to execute the additional effect. As already explained, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S2307 in the start effect setting process. Specifically, in the additional effect setting process (FIG. 60), if the current generation timing of the additional effect is set to full stop, all reels 32L, 32M, as shown in FIG. 66(c) , 32R is stopped, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display section 65. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional performance is emitted from the speaker 64.

After that, in step S2718, other stop effects are set, and then the main effect setting process is ended. In step S2718, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, the sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is emitted from the speaker 64, or during replay. The speaker 64 may control the sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet to be emitted from the speaker 64.

As described above, various processes for notifying the transition of display modes are performed on the display control device 81 side based on various commands from the main control device 101, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. In addition to notifying the transition of display modes, the display control device 81 side also performs various in-game presentation processes.

<Processing for various in-game effects>
In this embodiment, bonus effects and continuous effects are provided as effects during various games. Bonus effects are effects that are performed in each game during a bonus state that is entered based on winning the first BB or the second BB. Continuous effects are effects that make the player expect a favorable result (winning a bonus, AT mode, CZ mode, VB mode, etc.), and can be continued over multiple games (four games in this embodiment), and are effects that notify the player of whether or not the favorable result was achieved in the final game.

<Bonus performance setting process>
First, the bonus mid-effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63. The bonus effect setting process is a process executed in step S2308 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 58).

In the bonus effect setting process, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not a bonus game will start from the current game. The bonus game refers to the game from the game following the first BB, second BB, or RB winning to the end of the bonus. A positive determination is made in step S2801 when the first BB, second BB, or RB winning was achieved in the previous game. In this case, in step S2802, a process is performed to determine the current bonus type. More specifically, it is determined whether the current bonus game is based on the first BB winning, the second BB winning, or the RB winning. Then, in step S2803, the bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type determined in step S2802 is set. If a negative determination is made in step S2801, or after the process of step S2803 is executed, the bonus effect setting process is terminated.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the content of the bonus presentation in the case of the bonus game based on the first BB winning and the case of the bonus game based on the second BB winning is different to a degree that can be recognized by the player. More specifically, in the bonus game based on the first BB winning, a bonus presentation in which a live-action video presentation is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is set, and in the bonus game based on the second BB winning, a bonus presentation in which an animation presentation is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is set. In addition, the sound effects (songs) output from the speaker 64 are also different between the first BB and the second BB. Furthermore, in the case of the bonus game based on the RB winning, the content of the bonus presentation is different to a degree that can be recognized by the player from the case of the bonus game based on the first BB winning and the case of the bonus game based on the second BB winning.

All bonus effects are performed independently of the progress of the game, and are set to be repeated as long as the bonus game continues. For example, a five-minute video or animation effect is set as a unit effect, and when five minutes have passed since the start of the bonus effect and the unit effect ends, the unit effect is set to start again from the beginning. Note that the effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 may be configured to stop on the screen at the end of the unit effect, and only the sound effects (songs) may be repeated. Also, the effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 may be configured to be performed in synchronization with the progress of each game, and only the sound effects (songs) may be performed independently of the progress of each game.

As described above, while the bonus presentation based on the first BB winning and the bonus presentation based on the second BB winning are distinguishable, the game results that triggered the first BB winning and the second BB winning are set to be indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish from the bonus presentation. That is, for example, for the bonus presentation based on the first BB winning, the bonus presentation is indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish in the case where the first BB winning is triggered by the special lip A overlap 1 winning and the first BB winning is triggered by the special lip AB overlap 1 winning, and more specifically, the same bonus presentation is executed. The same is true for the bonus presentation based on the second BB winning, and for example, the bonus presentation triggered by the special lip A overlap 2 winning and the bonus presentation triggered by the special lip AB overlap 2 winning are indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish, and the same bonus presentation is executed.

<Processing for continuous performance>
The outline of the continuous performance will be explained with reference to FIG.

For example, as shown in FIG. 72(a), at the start of the first game in which the consecutive performance is set, a display is made suggesting the number of times the consecutive performance will continue (in the figure, four stages of Daruma Drop performance are shown to correspond to four consecutive performance games). Then, at the end of the first game in which the consecutive performance is set, a display is made to notify whether the consecutive performance will continue or not (in the figure, a display is shown in which the first stage of Daruma Drop is successful, indicating that the consecutive performance will continue). If the consecutive performance is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the consecutive performance is set, a display is made to notify that the consecutive performance will end halfway (for example, a display in which the first stage of Daruma Drop fails, etc.). The display regarding whether the consecutive performance will continue or not is the same for each game in the consecutive performance.

As shown in FIG. 72(b), at the start of the second game in which continuous effects are set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, there are three remaining Daruma doll effects). Then, at the end of the second game, a performance is performed to notify whether or not the continuous performance will continue (the figure shows the performance indicating that the second stage Daruma Drop has been successful, and it indicates that the continuous performance will continue). ).

As shown in FIG. 72(c), at the start of the third game in which continuous effects have been set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, the remaining two stages of Daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the third game, a performance is performed to notify whether or not the continuous performance will continue. ).

As shown in FIG. 72(d), at the start of the final game (the fourth game) of the series, a display is displayed indicating that it is the final game of the series (in the figure, a one-stage Daruma Drop display). Then, at the end of the final game, a display is displayed indicating whether the result was favorable for the player (in the figure, a display indicating that the final Daruma Drop was successful).

As described above, in continuous performance, the performance of the next game is set by continuing the performance of the previous game, and the performance of each game has continuity. Also, it is possible to clearly recognize which game the current game is from the start of the continuous performance (how many games there are until the end of the continuous performance).

Here, in each game of the continuous performance, whether or not the continuous performance will continue into the next game is set so that the continuation rate increases as the game of the continuous performance progresses. In other words, the possibility of the discontinuation of the continuous performance being notified is highest at the end of the first game of the continuous performance, and the more the game progresses, the lower the possibility of the discontinuation being notified. Therefore, in the continuous performance, the level of interest of the player varies greatly depending on which game in the continuous performance the current game is, and interest increases as the game progresses from the starting game to the ending game.

Hereinafter, as the processes related to the continuous effects, the transition trigger role notification process (step S2305) and the continuous effects setting process (step S2309) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 58) will be explained.

<Transition trigger notification process>
In the transition trigger role notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 64, first, in step S2901, a chance effect lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to set the chance effect as the effect of the current game. In the chance production, as shown in FIG. 71(b), for example, the characters "Chance!!" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and characters with exclamation marks are displayed on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. so that they are displayed in correspondence with each other. In addition, in the chance production, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "Kui"). In the chance effect lottery process, for example, a lottery is performed so that a chance effect occurs in approximately one-half of the times when the transition trigger combination is won. Note that the winning probability of the chance effect lottery process may be configured to vary depending on the type of transition trigger, display mode, gaming state, set value, etc. In the following step S2902, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S2901 has been won. If the player has won, a chance effect is set to be performed as the effect of the current game in step S2903.

Here, in this slot machine 10, recommended game modes for achieving winnings for each minor combination including the transition trigger combination will be explained.

Among the winning combinations in each game, the minor combinations that cannot be won due to the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 and that cause so-called missed wins are set to strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon. More specifically, as already explained, strong cherry is a combination that can be won by any of the 28th minor combination, 32nd minor combination to 35th minor combination, and the 28th minor combination symbol and the 32nd minor combination to 35th minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol. In this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 7th "red bell" symbol to the 20th "white bell" symbol reach the top of the left reel 32L, none of the 28th minor combination symbol and the 32nd minor combination symbol to the 35th minor combination symbol, the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol, can be stopped on the pay line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these times, the strong cherry role will be missed.

In addition, the weak cherry is a role that can win any of the 27th small role, 32nd small role to 35th small role, and the 27th small role symbol and the 32nd minor role symbol to the 32nd minor role symbol on the left reel 32L. The 35 small winning symbols are a "cherry" symbol and a "second replay" symbol. Even in this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 7th "Red Bell" symbol to the 20th "White Bell" symbol reaches the upper row of the left reel 32L, None of the above-mentioned 27th small role symbol, 32nd to 35th minor role symbol, the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol, can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak cherry combination will be missed.

The strong watermelon is a combination in which either the 30th or 41st minor combination can win, and the 30th and 41st minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are "watermelon" symbols. In this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped when the 9th "red 7" symbol to the 3rd "white bell" symbol reach the top of the left reel 32L, the 30th and 41st minor combination symbols, the "watermelon" symbols, cannot be stopped on an active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these times, the strong watermelon combination will be missed.

For the weak watermelon, either the 29th or 41st minor win symbol can win, and the 29th and 41st minor win symbols on the left reel 32L are the "watermelon" symbols. Even in this case, if the left reel 32L is stopped when the 9th "red 7" symbol through the 3rd "white bell" symbol reach the top of the left reel 32L in a 3-bet game, the 29th and 41st minor win symbols, the "watermelon" symbols, cannot be stopped on an active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these times, the weak watermelon symbol will be missed.

Then, if you operate the left reel 32L to stop while leaving the possibility of winning for any of these winning hands, the 4th "Cherry" symbol to the 6th "2nd Replay" symbol will be on the left reel 32L. It is necessary to perform a stop operation when the upper stage is reached. In the following explanation, the operation mode of the left reel 32L will also be referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not cause a missed draw, and each of the above-mentioned operation modes that cause a missed draw will be referred to as a non-specific operation. Also referred to as a mode (second operation mode).

In the chance presentation set in step S2903, it is suggested that the current winning role is one of the transition trigger roles, but it is set so that it is impossible or difficult to determine which transition trigger role it is. In other words, when the chance presentation is performed, the winning role for the current game is likely to be one of strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, etc., but it is not possible to determine whether it is a strong cherry or weak cherry, whether it is a strong watermelon or weak watermelon, or whether it is a strong cherry or strong watermelon. Therefore, the player will operate the left reel 32L in the specific operation mode described above so as not to miss out on any wins, regardless of which of the transition trigger roles has been won.

Also, the chance effect does not necessarily occur in a game in which the transition trigger role is won, but occurs only if the chance effect lottery process (step S2901) is won. Therefore, in order to avoid missing out on the transition trigger role, it is recommended that you operate the left reel 32L in the above-mentioned specific operation mode every game, even during normal play.

If a negative determination is made in step S2902, or after performing the process in step S2903, the process advances to step S2904. In step S2904, it is determined whether a precursor command is included as the current start command. If no precursor command is included, it is determined in step S2905 whether an additional command is included as the current start command. If the bonus command is not included, it is determined in step S2906 whether or not the bonus has been won. If you have not won a bonus, that is, if you have won a transition trigger such as strong cherry or weak watermelon as a lottery result, you will not be eligible for the lottery to transition to CZ mode, AT mode, or VB mode or the number of consecutive games will be increased. If the lottery has not been won and the bonus has not been won either, in step S2907, the lottery process in the pseudo omen mode is executed. Pseudo omen mode is visually difficult to distinguish from omen mode, but in omen mode, an advantageous result to the player (such as winning in CZ mode) is announced based on the completion of the number of omen games, while The pseudo-harbinger mode is a mode in which the game ends without notifying the player of an advantageous result based on the completion of the number of pseudo-harbinger games.

In step S2907, a table for the pseudo omen mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and a counter for the lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 183b, to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo omen mode. conduct. The table for the pseudo-harbinger mode lottery is set so that the probability of winning the pseudo-harbinger mode lottery differs depending on the type of winning transition trigger.For example, a strong cherry is more likely to win than a weak cherry. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in the pseudo omen mode is high.

In step S2908, it is determined based on the processing result in step S2907 whether or not the pseudo omen mode lottery has been won. If the player has won, in step S2909, a lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo omen mode is performed. This process corresponds to step S810 and the like on the main control device 101 side, and the number of pseudo precursor games of 1 from 1 to 20 is randomly determined by lottery. However, as described above, unlike the omen mode based on various winnings, the number of pseudo omen games is determined to be 20 or less. In addition, in the lottery for the number of pseudo precursor games, 0 games are not selected. In the following step S2910, the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2909 is set in the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous performance counter is a counter for keeping track of the number of games until the result is announced, and is decremented by 1 for each game. For example, in a configuration that performs a continuous performance of four games, the continuous performance is started in a game where the continuous performance counter becomes 4, and the result notification is performed in a game where the continuous performance counter becomes 0. In this embodiment, when the omen mode or pseudo omen mode is set, the omen mode or pseudo omen mode ends after continuous performance. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo precursor games into the continuous production counter in step S2910, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous production (4 games remaining), continuous production is started. It happens.

In step S2911, a process is executed to set a pseudo flag indicating that the mode is a pseudo precursor mode in the various flag storage areas 183a. In the following step S2912, a continuous effect flag is set. Thereafter, the transition trigger role notification process is ended. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S2904 to S2906, or if a negative determination is made in step S2908, the transition trigger combination notification process is directly terminated.

<Continuous performance setting process>
Next, the continuous performance setting process performed in step S2309 of the start-time performance setting process (FIG. 58) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3001, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included in the currently received start command. If a precursor command is included, in step S3002, a process is performed in which the number of precursor games in the precursor mode included in the precursor command is input into a continuous performance counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the portent mode becomes one corresponding to the start of continuous performance (4 games remaining), continuous performance will be started. In addition, when inputting the number of precursor games from 1 game to 3 games into the continuous performance counter in step S3002, the continuous performance is started from the middle. For example, if 2 is input to the continuous performance counter in step S3002, the continuous performance will start from the current game, and will be performed from the performance of the third continuous performance game in FIG. 72(c). Furthermore, when 0 is input to the continuous performance counter, that is, when the winning notification of AT mode or the like is performed without passing through the precursor mode, the continuous performance is not executed. After performing the process of step S3002, a continuous effect flag is set in step S3003.

If a negative determination is made in step S3001, or after the process in step S3003 is executed, the process advances to step S3004. In step S3004, it is determined whether the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous performance flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous performance counter is performed in step S3005. Then, in step S3006, it is determined whether the continuous performance counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to continuous performance. If the continuous performance counter is a number corresponding to continuous performance, it is determined in step S3007 whether or not a pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S3008, and the actual omen effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3009, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is specified from the present precursor performance table and the continuous performance counter, the corresponding performance data is acquired from the performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous performance is Perform the processing to set as . As for the performance data of the continuous performance specified from the performance table for this precursor, if the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, it is the performance data that indicates that the continuous performance will continue until the next game, and the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3. If it is 0, the performance data indicates that the current continuous performance ends successfully.

If it is determined in step S3007 that the pseudo flag is set, the process advances to step S3010. In step S3010, a pseudo omen effect table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S3011, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is specified from the pseudo-harbinger performance table and the continuous performance counter, the corresponding performance data is acquired from the performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous performance is Perform the processing to set as . If the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, the continuous performance performance data specified from the pseudo-foreshadowing performance table is performance data indicating that the continuous performance will continue until the next game or performance data indicating that the continuous performance will not continue. If the continuous performance counter is 0, the performance data indicates that the current continuous performance ends in failure.

Note that when the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, the performance data specified from the pseudo-harbinger performance table includes data for which no continuous performance is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, no continuous effect effect data is set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicates that the continuous effect will continue until the next game as shown in FIG. 72(a). When the performance data for the first game is set and the continuous performance counter is 0, the performance data for the second continuous performance game is set, which indicates that the continuous performance will not continue until the next game in FIG. 72(b). By doing so, it becomes possible to set a performance in which the continuous performance is interrupted in the middle in a game in which the number of pseudo-precursor games in the pseudo-precursor mode is 0.

After performing the processing of step S3009 or step S3011, in step S3012 it is determined whether the continuous performance counter is 0. If the continuous performance counter is 0, in step S3013 the continuous performance flag and pseudo flag are cleared. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative determination is made in step S3004, step S3006, or step S2912, or after performing the processing of step S3013, this continuous performance setting process is terminated.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, the lottery process is performed on the main controller 101 side based on the insertion of medals as game media and the starting operation of the start lever 41, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are Rotation is started, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and if the combination of symbols stopped on the active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop. In the configuration in which benefits are granted, there are multiple infinite RT states with different probabilities of becoming a replay as a result of the lottery process, and the infinite RT state will transition when the corresponding promotion replay or fall replay wins a prize. . Whether or not the corresponding replay will win a prize is determined by the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 in addition to the result of the lottery, and the notification of the order of operations is made by changing the display mode according to the result of the lottery process. This is done by winning a lottery. As a result of the lottery process, a push order bell is provided, and depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to establish the push order bell prize and win a medal. Then, by transitioning to a second RT state or a third RT state as an infinite RT state in which the replay probability is improved, and transitioning to a display mode in which the operation order is notified, a state in which the replay probability is improved in the infinite RT state. It is possible to establish a press order bell prize with the button, and it is possible to win a large amount of medals.

As already explained, when shifting to, for example, the AT mode, which is a mode in which a large amount of medals can be expected to be acquired, the initial number of games (50) is set, and it becomes possible to play in the AT mode over the initial number of games. If you win an additional lottery in the AT mode or the like, the number of consecutive games in the AT mode is added, and the number of games that can be played in the AT mode increases. As a result, the number of medals that can be acquired in the AT mode can also increase.

The transition lottery and additional lottery to these AT modes etc. are executed based on the game results of each game.More specifically, a transition lottery is held for the transition trigger role, and an additional lottery for a specific role including the transition trigger role. will be held. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, particularly in the CZ mode in which a lottery to transition to the AT mode is held, a lottery to transition to the AT mode may be held regardless of the game results of each game. Hereinafter, the configuration regarding the AT mode transition lottery in this embodiment will be explained.

<CZ mode processing>
As already explained, the lottery for transition to the AT mode is performed in the CZ mode. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the process for the CZ mode in this embodiment. The process for the CZ mode is a process performed in step S1603 of the game number management process (FIG. 49) in the winning result corresponding process executed at the end of the game. The CZ mode in this embodiment is configured to perform a lottery for transition to the AT mode according to the number of continuations as well as the lottery results of each game in the CZ mode, and to determine the continuation of the CZ mode by lottery. The process for the CZ mode is a process for performing a lottery for the AT mode according to the number of continuations of the CZ mode and a lottery for the continuation of the CZ mode.

In step S3101, it is determined whether or not a fall-down flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d. The fall-down flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to identify that the CZ mode has ended. The fall-down flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to identify that the CZ mode continuation lottery has been lost and the CZ mode has ended, that is, that the fall-down lottery to the normal mode has been won.

If it is determined in step S3101 that the fallen flag is set, a process is executed in step S3102 to clear the CZ mode flag. Then, in step S3103, a process is executed to set the CZ mode end command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the CZ mode processing is terminated. That is, in this case, a CZ mode end presentation (Figure 67 (b)) is generated in the game, and the player is notified that CZ mode has ended.

If it is determined in step S3101 that the fallen flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, an increment process for the number of CZ mode continuations is performed. More specifically, a process of incrementing the CZ mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e is performed.

As described above, in each game, the lottery for the transition to CZ mode and the lottery for adding the number of continuations in AT mode are restricted from being performed during the bonus state or the bonus carryover state. In the following explanation, the state in which the lottery for the instruction function is restricted from being performed during the bonus state or the bonus carryover state is also referred to as the restricted state. On the other hand, the addition process of the CZ mode continuation number in this CZ mode processing (step S3104) is performed regardless of whether or not the restricted state is in effect. In other words, the addition process of the CZ mode continuation number can be said to be a process that is continued (performed) even in a situation in which the lottery for the instruction function is restricted from being performed.

Then, in step S3105, it is determined whether the value of the continuation counter has reached 19 or not. That is, it is determined whether the current game is the 19th game in CZ mode. If it is the 19th game and the next game is the 20th game, in step S3106 a process is executed to set a fall lottery flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the CZ mode process is ended. The falling lottery flag is a flag used by the CPU 102 to specify that the situation is such that a continuous lottery in the CZ mode, that is, a falling lottery should be carried out. In this embodiment, a fall lottery is carried out after the 20th game in the CZ mode, and when the player wins the fall lottery, the CZ mode ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode. In other words, the CZ mode in this embodiment is configured to continue for at least 20 games even if the player does not win the lottery for switching to the AT mode.

If it is determined in step S3105 that the game is not the 19th game, the process proceeds to step S3107. In step S3107, it is determined whether the value of the continuation counter has reached 29. In other words, it is determined whether the current game is the 29th game in the CZ mode. If it is the 29th game and the next game is the 30th game, it is determined in step S3108 whether the current game is in a bonus state or a bonus carryover state. If it is not in a restricted state such as a bonus state or a bonus carryover state, the process proceeds to step S3109, where a process is executed to clear the CZ mode flag, and a process is executed to set the AT mode winning flag in step S3110. Then, in step S3111, a process is executed to set the premonition command that sets the premonition game count to 0 as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the process for the CZ mode is terminated. In this case, the CZ mode is terminated in the current game, and an AT mode winning notification effect is performed in the next game (FIG. 68(a)).

On the other hand, if the current game is not the 29th game in step S3107, or if the current game is in a restricted state in step S3108, the processing for CZ mode ends. That is, in this embodiment, the transition to the AT mode is confirmed by continuing the CZ mode for 30 games, provided that the game is not in a restricted state during a bonus state or a bonus carryover state. In addition, from the 20th game onwards in the CZ mode, a drop-out lottery for the CZ mode is held, so in the CZ mode, if the game can be continued up to the 30th game while avoiding the drop-out lottery from the 20th game onwards, the transition to the AT mode is confirmed.

<AT mode lottery processing>
The AT mode lottery process performed according to the lottery results of each game will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 74. The AT mode lottery process is a process performed when the current display mode is the CZ mode in the first specific combination process (Fig. 32) (step S811).

In step S3201, it is determined whether the end CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As mentioned above, the implementation of the lottery related to the instruction function is restricted in the restricted state such as the bonus state or the bonus carryover state, while the process of adding the number of continuations of the CZ mode (step S3104) is restricted in the restricted state. It will continue to be implemented. On the other hand, in the CZ mode, a fall lottery is carried out from the 20th game onward, and if the player wins the fall lottery, the CZ mode may end. The above CZ flag at end is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the CZ mode has continued until the end of the bonus, and is set in step S1717 of the end determination process (FIG. 50) performed at the end of the bonus. This is the flag to be used.

If the CZ mode flag is not set at the time of termination, proceed to step S3202 to determine whether or not the state is restricted. If the state is restricted, the AT mode lottery process ends without performing the process of whether or not to transition to the AT mode from step S3203 onwards. In other words, in the restricted state, the implementation of the AT mode transition lottery is also restricted.

If a negative determination is made in step S3202, the process advances to step S3203, and it is determined whether the above-mentioned fall lottery flag is set. That is, it is determined whether the current game is the 20th game or later in the CZ mode. If it is the 20th game or later, the process advances to step S3204, and it is determined whether the lottery result of the current game is a transition trigger, such as a strong cherry. If it is not a transition trigger, that is, if it is a non-transition trigger such as replay, push order bell, missed result, strong cherry duplication 2 or strong watermelon duplication 2, the process advances to step S3205.

In step S3205, a CZ mode fall lottery is executed. The winning probability (falling rate) of the CZ mode falling lottery is arbitrary, but in this embodiment it is assumed that there is a 50% probability of falling winning. In other words, after the 20th game in CZ mode, 50% of the time the transition trigger role is not won, the CZ mode ends, and 50% of the time the transition trigger role is won or the transition trigger role is not won. The structure is designed to continue.

In step S3206, it is determined whether or not a drop-out win has been made based on the processing result of step S3205. If a drop-out win has been made, a process to set the drop-out flag is executed in step S3207, and then the AT mode lottery process is terminated. In this case, a positive determination is made in step S3101 of the above-mentioned CZ mode process (Figure 73) that is executed at the end of the game, and the process for ending the CZ mode is executed. Also, in this case, a lottery for transition to the AT mode is not executed in the game.

If the falling lottery flag is not set in step S3203 and the game is up to the 19th game in the CZ mode, or if the transition trigger role is won in step S3204 even after the 20th game, or if the winning chance is determined in step S3206. If the player does not win the fall lottery, the AT mode transition lottery is carried out in step S3208, and then the AT mode lottery process ends. In this case, a lottery for shifting to the AT mode is carried out based on the CZ mode table acquired in step S810 and the game results of the current game. As already explained, on the CZ mode table, if the lottery result of this game is a strong cherry, there is a 45% probability of winning the lottery to switch to AT mode, and if the lottery result is a weak cherry, there is a 15% probability. The probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is set to differ depending on the lottery result of each game, such as winning the AT mode transition lottery (FIG. 38).

If it is determined in step S3201 that the end time CZ flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3209. In step S3209, it is determined whether the CZ mode continuation number is 29 or more. That is, as described above, in step S3104, the process of adding the number of continuations of the CZ mode is configured to continue even in the restricted state during the bonus state or the bonus carryover state. On the other hand, in the restricted state, even if the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches 30 (even if the next game is the 30th game), the transition to the AT mode is not confirmed. For example, as a result of the process of adding the number of continuations of the CZ mode in the bonus end game (step S3104), even if the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches 29 in the bonus end game, the process is determined to be negative in step S3108 and the process for winning the AT mode is not performed. The processes of step S3201 and step S3209 can be said to be processes for performing an AT mode lottery based on the number of continuations of the CZ mode, including the games performed in the restricted state.

If a negative determination is made in step S3209 and the number of continuations in the CZ mode has not reached 29 even though the end CZ flag is set, the process advances to step S3202, and the normal AT mode lottery Execute processing. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3209 and the end CZ flag is set and the number of CZ mode continuations is 29 or more, a process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in step S3210. In step S3211, the AT mode winning flag is set. Then, in step S3212, a process is executed to set a precursor command that sets the number of continuations of the precursor mode to 0 as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this AT mode lottery process ends. In this case, the CZ mode ends in the current game, and AT mode winning notification is executed in the current game (FIG. 68(a)).

As described above, in this embodiment, the player is configured to win the lottery for transition to the AT mode by continuing the CZ mode for 30 games, and the number of times the CZ mode continues is counted even in a restricted state such as a bonus state. In this way, winning the bonus during the CZ mode makes it easier to win the lottery for transition to the AT mode.

<Relationship between bonus and CZ mode>
Here, the relationship between each bonus and the CZ mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 75.

The first BB and the second BB transition to a bonus state that continues until the number of coins paid out reaches 270, and these bonus states continue for about 30 games. In the CZ mode, a falling lottery is held after the 20th game, but by continuing for 30 games, it is certain that you will win the lottery to switch to the AT mode. In a restricted state such as a bonus state, the falling lottery is restricted, but the number of continuations of the CZ mode continues to be counted. Therefore, by transitioning to a bonus state based on the 1st BB or 2nd BB during CZ mode, the number of continuations in the CZ mode will reach 30 games during the bonus state, and you can win the lottery to transition to AT mode. is confirmed.

With setting 1, the probability of winning the first BB is about 1/720, and with setting 6, the probability of winning is about 1/330. On the other hand, with setting 1, the second BB will win with a probability of about 1/640, and with setting 6, with a probability of about 1/380. As mentioned above, a large amount of medals can be expected to be paid out in the bonus state that is entered by winning the first BB or the second BB, so setting 6 can be said to be a setting value with a higher expectation of medal acquisition than setting 1. Not only that, as mentioned above, if you win the 1st BB or 2nd BB during CZ mode, you will win the lottery to switch to AT mode, so in terms of the winning probability of AT mode, setting 6 is better than setting 1. It can be said that they are given preferential treatment.

As shown in the AT mode transition lottery table for the CZ mode, the lottery regarding the instruction function is configured to be carried out using strong cherries, strong cherries duplication 1, etc. as game results with no setting difference in winning probability. In particular, among the results of duplicate winnings of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, duplicate results with different settings are not subject to the AT mode transition lottery. In other words, in each game in the CZ mode, the transition lottery probability in the AT mode is the same regardless of the set value. Also, the count of the number of CZ mode continuations is incremented by 1 every game.For example, if setting 1, it will be added by 1, but if setting 6, it will be added by 2. Different processing is not performed depending on the

On the other hand, as described above, by configuring the game so that the player wins the AT mode transition lottery when the CZ mode continuation count reaches 30, the occurrence rate of the specific event of transitioning to AT mode can vary greatly depending on the setting value. In this way, it is possible to vary the occurrence rate of the specific event depending on the setting value while keeping in mind the configuration in which there is no difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value in each game.

On the other hand, regarding the RB of the bonus, it transitions to a bonus state that continues until the number of paid out coins reaches 90, and this bonus state continues for about 10 games. It's shorter than a game. Then, when an RB win is won during the CZ mode, depending on the game in which the RB win is established, the transition to the AT mode may or may not be confirmed in the CZ mode.

As described above, the relationship between the bonus state and the CZ mode, including the fact that the timing of the transition to the RB state can affect whether the AT mode is selected or not, will be explained with reference to the timing charts in Figures 76 and 77.

When the CZ mode starts at time t1, a lottery for transition to the AT mode is held from time t1. If the lottery for transition to the AT mode is not won by time t2, and the number of consecutive games in the CZ mode reaches 20 at time t2, a lottery for dropping out of the CZ mode will be held from that game. If the lottery for dropping out is not won until time t3, before the number of consecutive games in the CZ mode reaches 30, and the lottery for transition to the AT mode is won at time t3, an AT mode winning notification effect will notify you that you have won the lottery for transition to the AT mode, and then the transition to the AT mode will occur. Note that even if the lottery for transition to the AT mode is won before time t2, when the lottery for dropping out begins, transition to the AT mode is permitted after that.

On the other hand, when the CZ mode started at time t4 reaches the 20th game at time t5, a drop-out lottery will be held in the same manner as above. Then, if the drop-out lottery is not won until time t3 when the number of continuations in CZ mode reaches 30 games, and if the transition lottery to AT mode is not won until time t3, the transition lottery to AT mode will be won based on the number of continuations in CZ mode at time t3, and transition to AT mode will then be permitted.

Next, we will explain what happens when you switch to bonus mode during CZ mode.

After the CZ mode starts at the timing of t11 and the AT mode transition lottery also starts, at the timing of t12, for example, if you win the first BB, the AT mode will change from t12 to t13 while the bonus is carried over. The implementation of the transition lottery will be restricted. When the first BB winning occurs at the timing t13, the AT mode transition lottery is restricted even during the bonus state. However, the CZ mode itself continues, and the number of continuations of the CZ mode continues to be added even after the timing t12 when the AT mode transition lottery is restricted. As a result, the number of continuous CZ modes reaches 20 at timing t14.

However, the situation in which the number reaches 20 is still in the bonus state, and implementation of the falling lottery is also restricted. Then, at timing t15, the number of continuous CZ modes reaches 30. However, the timing when the number reaches 30 is still in the bonus state, and the implementation of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted. Therefore, at the timing of t30, the transition to the AT mode does not occur. Then, at timing t16 when the bonus state ends, an AT mode transition lottery is carried out based on the number of continuations of the CZ mode, and an AT mode transition winning occurs.

On the other hand, during the CZ mode that started at timing t17, if you win an RB at timing t18, the timing from t18 to t19 during the bonus carryover state, or from t19 to t21 during the bonus state based on the RB winning. At the timing of , the implementation of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted. Further, as described above, the execution of the falling lottery is restricted during the bonus state after the timing t20 when the number of CZ mode continuations reaches 20. However, the bonus state based on the RB winning may end at timing t21, which is before the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches 30. Then, although the AT mode transition lottery is restarted, a fall lottery will also be held, and for example, if the fall lottery is won at timing t22, the CZ mode will end and the transition to the AT mode will not occur. In other words, depending on the end timing (winning timing) of the bonus state based on RB, the transition to the AT mode may not occur, and the bonus winning during the CZ mode may not be effectively utilized.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when an RB is won, the content of the winning notification is changed depending on the number of times the CZ mode continues.

<Setting process for bonus winning notification effect>
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the bonus winning notification performance in this embodiment. This setting process is a process that is executed in step S2208 when a bonus winning notification command is received from the main control device 101 in the bet performance setting process (FIG. 57).

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether the current game is in the CZ mode or not, more specifically, if the current game is not a game that starts during the CZ mode, and if a CZ mode end command is received before the current bet operation. If not, it is determined in step S3301 that the CZ mode is not in progress. If the CZ mode is not in progress, it is determined in step S3302 whether the type of bonus won this time is the first BB, second BB, or RB. Then, in step S3303, the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that the winning notification corresponding to the bonus type is notified, and then this setting process is ended.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 80, it is preferable to make the manner of the bonus winning notification different depending on the type of the current bonus. For example, if the current bonus is the first BB, as shown in FIG. 80(a), a "red 7" symbol, a "red 7" symbol, and a character of a "red 7" symbol are displayed as the stop symbols corresponding to the first BB winning, together with a display of "bonus confirmed". On the other hand, if the current bonus is the second BB, as shown in FIG. 80(b), a "white BAR" symbol, a "white BAR" symbol, and a character of a "white BAR" symbol are displayed as the stop symbols corresponding to the second BB winning, together with a display of "bonus confirmed". And, if the current bonus is RB, a "black BAR" symbol, a "red 7" symbol, and a character of a "black BAR" symbol are displayed as the stop symbols corresponding to the RB winning, together with a display of "bonus confirmed". In this way, the player can grasp the winning mode along with the bonus type, and can quickly transition to the corresponding bonus state.

If it is determined in step S3301 that the mode is CZ, the process proceeds to step S3304. In step S3304, a process of determining the type of bonus is executed, similar to step S3302. Then, in step S3305, it is determined whether the bonus to be notified of the current winning is RB. If it is not RB but the first BB or second BB, the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc. are controlled in step S3306 so that a winning notification performance during the CZ for the first BB or second BB is performed, and then this setting process is terminated.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 81, a pre-win notification that the current bonus win will result in a win in the AT mode transition lottery is made together with the bonus win notification. For example, as shown in FIG. 81(a) and FIG. 81(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled so that "AT confirmed" is displayed together with the contents of the first BB winning notification in FIG. 80(a) and the contents of the second BB winning notification in FIG. 80(b). The display of "AT confirmed" may be displayed, for example, at the top or bottom of the screen so as not to overlap with the information display showing the contents of the first BB winning notification and the contents of the second BB winning notification (the text display of "bonus confirmed" or the character display of the pattern corresponding to the winning mode). In addition, a sound effect (for example, an electronic sound such as "beep") as the pre-win notification may be emitted from the speaker 64.

In other words, if the bonus won during CZ mode is the first or second BB, the player will not win the lottery to transition to AT mode when the bonus is won or during the bonus state, but the bonus state will end when CZ mode has continued for 30 games or more, and it is possible to know in advance that the player will win the lottery to transition to AT mode in the first game after the bonus state ends.

Therefore, by performing early winning notification as in the above configuration, it is possible to notify in advance that the transition to AT mode is permitted after the bonus based on winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB. It is also possible to make different states such as 2BB and AT mode, in which you can expect to win a large amount of medals, appear as a series of states.

If it is determined in step S3305 that the bonus to be notified of the current winning is an RB, the process proceeds to step S3307. In step S3307, a process is executed to grasp the current number of continuations of the CZ mode. Then, in step S3308, by determining whether or not there are 20 games or more, it is determined whether or not the number of continuations of the CZ mode will reach 30 games by winning the RB to be notified of the current winning. If it is determined in step S3308 that there are 20 games or more and that the number of continuations of the CZ mode will reach 30 games by going through the bonus state based on the winning of the RB, the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc. are controlled in step S3309 so that a winning notification performance during the CZ for RB is performed, and then this setting process is terminated.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 82(a), along with the message "Bonus Confirmed", characters of "Black BAR" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Black BAR" symbol are displayed as stop symbols corresponding to RB winnings. let Further, as in the case of FIG. 81 above, notification of the first prize in the AT mode is made. Note that when the RB winning notification is performed in step S3303, the content in FIG. 82(a) does not include the early winning notification.

If it is determined in step S3308 that the CZ mode has not reached 20 games, the auxiliary display section 65, speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that a non-winning CZ medium winning notification effect is performed in step S3310. Thereafter, in step S3311, the winning postponement flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a, and then this setting process is ended.

As shown in FIG. 82(b), in the non-winning CZ mid-win notification performance, a message saying "Wait a minute! !” and a predetermined character are displayed. In addition, in the non-winning CZ medium winning notification performance, for example, a display saying "Aim for the LUCKY symbol on the left reel" is displayed as an operation to prevent the RB winning from being established. In other words, as a winning mode of RB winning, the left reel 32L is associated with the "BLACK BAR" symbol, and the left reel 32L is stopped when the "LUCKY" symbol reaches the upper to lower rows of the left reel 32L. If you do this, you will not be able to draw in the "Black BAR" symbol, and no RB winnings will be made. Therefore, the above-mentioned display of "Aim for the KUCKY symbol on the left reel" can also be referred to as an operation instruction performance for a losing operation that instructs an operation to miss the RB winnings. The winning postponement flag set in step S3311 is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the operation instruction performance for the above-mentioned missed operation has been performed.

In addition, in the non-winning CZ medium winning notification performance, the winning notification display character BP including the content of the RB winning notification shown in FIG. 82(a) is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. That is, even if a non-winning CZ winning notification performance is performed, the player can grasp the type of the won bonus and the manner in which it is won. By doing this, a player who does not want to win the transition to AT mode but still wants to win an RB prize can quickly win an RB prize, such as when playing time is limited, such as when the store is about to close. becomes possible.

By setting the winning postponement flag in step S3311, a positive judgment is made in step S2211 in the bet time performance setting process, and the special notification process in step S2212 is performed. Here, the special notification process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 79.

In step S3401, processing is executed to determine the number of CZ mode continuations. In addition, when special notification processing is performed following the bonus winning notification performance setting process (FIG. 78), the processing result of step S3307 is temporarily stored in a register, etc., and the temporarily stored information is transferred to step S3401. It is also possible to use a configuration in which the information is read out.

In step S3402, it is determined whether the number of consecutive games in CZ mode has reached 20 games. If it has not been reached, the auxiliary display section 65, speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that the RB postponement winning notification effect is performed in step S3403, and then this special notification process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3402 that the number of consecutive games in the CZ mode has reached 20 games, the winning postponement flag is cleared in step S3404, and a winning notification effect for after RB postponement is performed in step S3405. After controlling the auxiliary display section 65, speaker 64, etc., this special notification process is ended.

In the winning notification display during RB postponement, as shown in FIG. 83(a), the operation instruction display for the missed-out operation and the winning notification display character BP are displayed, and the words "Life extension" are displayed to indicate that the situation has not yet reached where an RB win should be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 83(b), in the winning notification effect for after RB postponement, the "black BAR" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "black BAR" symbol characters are displayed as the stopping symbols corresponding to an RB win, and "Aim!!" is displayed as an operation instruction effect for winning that instructs the operation to achieve an RB win. This allows the player to understand that a situation has been reached where a win to transition to the AT mode is confirmed by achieving an RB win. Note that the winning notification effect for after RB postponement may also be configured to notify of a pre-win in the AT mode.

<Situation at the time of RB election>
An overview of the lottery for transitioning to AT mode when RB is won during CZ mode will be explained with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 84 along with notification contents.

When the CZ mode starts at the time t21, the RB is won at the time t22 before 20 games have been played. In this case, if an RB win is achieved at the time t22, after the bonus state based on the RB win, the number of continuations in the CZ mode may not yet reach 30 games. Therefore, at the time t22, a non-winning CZ win notification effect is displayed along with an operation instruction effect for missed operations, and it is notified that a RB win should not be achieved.

After that, at the timing of t23, in the carryover state until the number of continuous CZ mode games reaches 20, the RB postponement winning notification effect is performed, and it is announced that it is not yet the situation where RB winning should be established. In this situation, as described above, not only is the AT mode transition lottery restricted, but the fall lottery is also restricted, and CZ mode will not end in this situation.

When the number of continuations in CZ mode reaches 20 games at the time t23, a winning notification for after RB delay is performed, and it is announced that a situation has been reached where an RB win should be achieved. Then, when an RB win is achieved, a transition to a bonus state of about 10 games occurs, and at the time t24 when the bonus state ends, the number of continuations in CZ mode has reached 30 games, and the player wins the lottery for transitioning to AT mode.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

On the premise that a drop-out lottery is held in CZ mode, a transition to AT mode occurs when the number of continuations in CZ mode reaches the ceiling of 30 games. Furthermore, if a bonus is won during CZ mode, the drop-out lottery in CZ mode is restricted during the bonus state or bonus carryover state, while the number of continuations in CZ mode is counted. In this way, a new gameplay can be realized by taking advantage of the fact that the execution of lotteries related to instruction functions is restricted during the bonus state or bonus carryover state.

In this embodiment, since the configuration is such that the execution of the falling lottery during the CZ mode is restricted even during the bonus state, the number of continuations of the bonus state can contribute to the count up to the ceiling of the CZ mode. In other words, it is easier to win AT mode based on the number of consecutive CZ modes in the bonus state (1st BB state, 2nd BB state) in which a long number of games are played than in the bonus state (RB state) in which a short number of games are played. Become. By doing this, the advantage of the bonus can be evaluated based on a different scale than before, such as the number of continuations, rather than the lottery results of each game during the bonus state (number of medals paid out, performance of lottery regarding instruction function based on results, etc.). This can be of great help in realizing new gaming features.

If you win the 1st BB or 2nd BB, a minimum of 30 bonus games will be executed, so if you win the 1st BB or 2nd BB during CZ mode, you will win the AT mode lottery based on the number of continuations in CZ mode. is confirmed. By doing this, it is possible to award or not award an AT mode win depending on the winning situation, without changing the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery based on the first BB or the second BB.

When RB is won, a bonus state of a minimum of 10 games will be executed, so if RB is won during CZ mode, it becomes easier to win the AT mode lottery based on the number of continuations during CZ mode, but it does not guarantee that the AT mode will be won. By doing this, the timing of the RB win and the timing of the transition to the RB state become important factors in winning the AT mode, making the game more interesting.

When an RB is won, the number of continuations in the CZ mode is ascertained, and if the ceiling of the CZ mode is not reached in the RB state based on the RB winning, a non-winning CZ winning announcement performance is performed. . By doing so, it becomes difficult to cause a situation where the player wins an RB in the CZ mode, but ends up winning the prize immediately and the AT mode winning is not confirmed.

Here, for example, even if the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery during CZ mode is based on RB, there is a 100% probability of winning AT mode, but the probability of winning AT mode is 100% based on the winning of RB during CZ mode. It is possible to avoid events that do not occur. However, in this case, it is necessary to make the winning probability of RB so that there is no difference depending on the setting value, and furthermore, it is up to the player whether or not to shift to AT mode. Once adjusted, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will start based on the player's start operation, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will stop based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. This may go against the real thrill of the slot machine 10, in which the player plays the game. Therefore, as described above, by leaving it to the player's operation to decide whether or not the AT mode is appropriate based on RB winning during the CZ mode, the player can enjoy the AT mode to the extent that it does not go against the real thrill of playing the slot machine 10. be able to.

As described above, when comparing the first BB and second BB, which can execute a 30-game bonus state, with the RB, which can execute a 10-game bonus state, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted in both bonus states, but the greater the number of games, the easier it is to transition to the AT mode. By restricting the execution of the AT mode transition lottery during the bonus state, it is possible to prevent the bonus state from becoming too advantageous, and to suppress a rise in the ball payout rate. However, in a configuration in which the execution of such an AT mode transition lottery is restricted, it may seem as if the opportunity for the transition lottery has been exploited, which may result in a loss of motivation for the player to play. Therefore, by making it easier to transition to the AT mode depending on the number of games in the bonus state, as in the above configuration, it is possible to replace the restricted transition lottery and create a gaming machine that meets the expectations of players.

During the bonus state, the first role for BB/RB will generally win with a high probability, and in rare cases, the second role for BB/RB or the third role for BB/RB will win. Therefore, it is basically possible to predict the number of games during the bonus state in advance based on the first role for BB/RB, and based on this prediction, it is possible to determine in advance whether the AT mode will be successful based on the number of times the CZ mode continues. Therefore, it is possible to notify the result of the AT mode in question before the bonus state is exhausted.

The AT mode is determined based on the number of continuations of the CZ mode when the start lever 41 is operated, and the falling lottery is performed when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and in each game, the AT mode is determined based on the number of continuations. The structure is such that the judgment of whether the game is correct or not is carried out before the lottery. By doing this, even though you reached the ceiling of CZ mode during the bonus state, after the bonus state ends, the CZ mode ends before the judgment based on the number of CZ mode continuations and you win AT mode. This will prevent the occurrence of an event where the value is not determined.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, on the premise that the transition lottery to the AT mode is performed during the CZ mode, an example of notification in the case of a configuration in which the first BB, second BB, RB (especially RB) and the AT mode can be simultaneously won will be described. That is, in the above first embodiment, the lottery table was set so that the transition lottery to the AT mode triggered by the overlapping result of the strong cherry and the first BB, second BB, RB, or the single result of these first BB, second BB, RB will not be won (FIG. 38), but in this modified example, it is set so that the transition lottery to the AT mode triggered by these overlapping results or single results can be won. Note that the winning probability of the transition lottery based on these overlapping results or single results is arbitrary, but the winning result may be different depending on the type of result, for example, by making it easier to win the transition lottery for results with a lower occurrence rate.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a process for setting the bonus winning notification performance in this modification.

If it is determined in step S3501 that the CZ mode is not in progress, the bonus type is determined in step S3502, and a winning notification effect corresponding to the bonus type is generated in step S3503. If it is determined in step S3501 that the CZ mode is in effect, then in step S3504 a process for determining the bonus type is executed, and then in step S3505 it is determined whether or not the RB has been won, and the 1st BB or 2nd BB has been won. If so, a CZ winning notification effect for the first BB and second BB is generated in step S3506. In this case, an AT mode first prize notification effect occurs. The processing from step S3501 to step S3506 is similar to the processing from step S3301 to step S3306.

If it is determined in step S3505 that an RB win has occurred, in this modified example, the process proceeds to step S3507 to determine whether a simultaneous win has occurred in the AT mode. If a simultaneous win has not occurred, the number of continuations of the CZ mode is determined in step S3508, and if it is 20 games or more in step S3509, a win notification effect during the CZ for RB is generated in step S3510. In this case, a first win notification effect for the AT mode is generated. Then, if it is less than 20 games, a win notification effect during the CZ for non-winning is set in step S3511, and a winning postponement flag is set in step S3512. Note that the processing in steps S3508 to S3512 is the same as the processing in steps S3307 to S3311 described above.

If a simultaneous win in AT mode is determined in step S3507, proceed to step S3510 and generate a win notification display during the CZ for RB. In this case, a first win notification display for the AT mode is also generated.

That is, in the first embodiment, the timing of the RB winning during the CZ mode determines whether the AT mode transition lottery is successful or not, and the AT mode first winning notification effect is performed when the RB win is notified. In addition, in this modified example, if a simultaneous win with the AT mode occurs, regardless of the timing of the RB winning and RB winning, the first winning notification effect of the AT mode is generated when the RB win is notified. This makes it possible to give the impression that the AT mode win notified by the first winning notification effect of the AT mode based on the number of consecutive wins in the CZ mode is based on a simultaneous win, and it makes it possible to give the impression that the first winning notification effect of the AT mode based on a simultaneous win is based on the number of consecutive wins in the CZ mode. In other words, by notifying AT modes with different winning games in the same game (RB winning game) with similar content, the impression that the winning games are different is weakened, and the winning opportunity is made difficult to understand, making the AT mode win unexpected and increasing the joy when the first winning notification effect is performed.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, a modification of RB is shown. Fig. 86 is a diagram for explaining the winning modes of various RBs and the contents of the RB state. In this modification, the lottery tables used in each game during the bonus state based on the winning of various RBs are all the same as those in the first embodiment (Fig. 28).

In the 1st RB, a winning is achieved when the "Black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. This is the same content as the RB of the first embodiment.

In contrast, the second RB has a corresponding symbol on the left reel 32L that is set to a "red 7" symbol in addition to a "black BAR" symbol, a corresponding symbol on the center reel 32M that is set to a "white bell" symbol, and a corresponding symbol on the right reel 32R that is set to a "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol. In other words, the left reel 32L has more corresponding symbols than the first RB, so that it is set to be less likely to miss out. On the other hand, the "white bell" symbol is placed 6th on the center reel 32M, and the number of symbols arranged is the same as that of the "red 7" symbol in the first RB. The "white bell" symbol and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are both arranged within 4 symbols, so that it is set to be less likely to miss out. Taking all of this into consideration, it can be said that the second RB has a winning mode that is less likely to cause misses than the first RB.

In the third RB, the corresponding symbols on the left reel are set to "Black BAR" and "Red 7" as well as "LUCKY", the corresponding symbols on the middle reel 32M are set to "First Replay" and "Second Replay", and the right reel 32R is set to "Red Bell" and "White Bell", similar to the second RB. In other words, the left reel 32L has more corresponding symbols than the second RB, making it even less likely that a miss will occur. Also, the "First Replay" and "Second Replay" symbols on the middle reel 32M are both arranged within four symbols, making it less likely that a miss will occur. Taking all of this into consideration, it can be said that the third RB is set to have a winning mode that is less likely to cause misses than the second RB.

It is assumed that all of these 1st RB to 3rd RB are transitioned to a bonus state with a payout limit of 90 coins, and the advantages thereof are the same. On the other hand, since the ease with which winnings occur differs as described above, the difficulty level for confirming the AT mode winning is different, especially when winning during the CZ mode.

In other words, when a winning notification effect occurs during a non-winning CZ as described above, it is necessary to miss an RB and extend the bonus state based on an RB winning until a winning notification effect occurs after an RB delay. However, if the ease of achieving an RB winning differs, the difficulty of causing the miss also differs. This means that the difficulty of the operation to confirm an AT mode win during CZ mode also differs.

In other words, for the 1st RB winning, it is possible to prevent the corresponding symbol from stopping by operating with the 1st specific operation, and for the 2nd RB winning, it is possible to stop the corresponding symbol by operating with the 2nd specific operation. It is possible to prevent the corresponding symbols from stopping, and the third RB winning can be made not to stop the corresponding symbols by operating with the third specific operation. The second specific operation has a higher difficulty level than the first specific operation, and the third specific operation is set to have an even higher difficulty level than the second specific operation, so the CZ mode The difficulty level for confirming AT mode winning will vary depending on which RB is won. Therefore, the fun in CZ mode can be increased by hoping to win the RB with the lowest difficulty possible while in the CZ mode, and even if you miss out on winning the RB with high difficulty, depending on the player's skill, the AT Since it is possible to confirm the winning of the mode, it is also possible to increase the user's desire to operate by motivating them to improve their skills.

The 4th RB consists of the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. ” symbol or the “Second Replay” symbol stops on the active line, it is set as a winning result. On the other hand, the 5th RB includes the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white bell" symbol or "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R. It is set that a winning is established when the symbol or the "red bell" symbol stops on the activated line. These, the "first replay" symbol and "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol and "second replay" symbol, the "white bell" symbol and the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, The "1st Replay" symbol, the "2nd Replay" symbol, the "White Bell" symbol, and the "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are all arranged within 4 symbols, and are set so that they will not be missed. ing. In other words, the 4th RB and the 5th RB are RBs that will not be missed, and a prize is established in the winning game.

The maximum payout number for the 4th RB is set to 90 coins, and the maximum payout number for the 5th RB is set to 180 coins, and the number of medals that can be acquired during the bonus state is greater for the 5th RB than for the 4th RB. Furthermore, the number of continuing games during the bonus state is 20 games for the 5th RB and 10 games for the 4th RB, so the number of continuing games is longer for the 5th RB than for the 4th RB. As a result, it is easier to confirm an AT mode win by winning the 5th RB than by winning the 4th RB during the CZ mode. In other words, in the 4th RB, if the 4th RB is won after the 20th game of the CZ mode, the AT mode win is confirmed, while in the 5th RB, if the win is made after the 10th game of the CZ mode, the AT mode win is confirmed. In this way, it is possible to vary the probability of winning the AT mode depending on the number of continuing games in the bonus state.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the lottery table used in each game during the bonus state is different depending on the type of RB that was won (awarded). Here, the first RB to the third RB are used as examples of various RBs. The winning modes of the first RB to the third RB may be the first RB to the third RB in the above modification 2, or other winning modes may be used. Also, the maximum payout number of the first RB to the third RB is 90 coins for each of the following description.

Figure 87 (a) shows a part of the lottery table for the first RB state. The point value PV for IV=29 is set to "65516", and the point values PV for IV=30, 31 are set to "10". Therefore, in the first RB state, the probability of winning the first role in BB/RB (probability of winning when IV=29) is about 1 in 1.00, and the probability of winning the second role in BB/RB or the third role in BB/RB (probability of winning when IV=30, 31) is about 1 in 6560, and no loss occurs. In this case, the probability of winning the first role in BB/RB, in which 9 medals are paid out, is about 1 in 1.00 as described above, and the average number of continuing games (average number of staying games) during the first RB state is about 10 games, as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 87(b) shows a part of the second RB state lottery table. "32768" is set as the point value PV for IV=29, and "16384" is set as the point value PV for IV=30 and 31, respectively. Therefore, in the second RB state, the probability of winning the first role among BB/RB (probability of winning when IV = 29) is approximately 1/2.00, and the probability of winning the first role among BB/RB and BB - The probability of winning the third role in RB (probability of winning when IV = 30,1) is approximately 1/4.00, and no events of losing occur. In this case, the probability of winning the first prize in BB/RB in which nine medals are paid out is approximately 1/2.00, as described above, and the average number of consecutive games during the second RB state (average staying games) is approximately 1/2.00. (number) is approximately 20 games longer than the first RB state.

FIG. 87(c) shows a part of the third RB state lottery table. "21846" is set as the point value PV of IV=29, and "21845" is set as the point value PV of IV=30 and 31, respectively. Therefore, in the 3rd RB state, the probability of winning the first role among BB/RB (probability of winning when IV = 29) is about 1/3.00, and the probability of winning the first role among BB/RB and BB - The probability of winning the third role in RB (probability of winning when IV = 30,1) is approximately 1/3.00, and no events of losing occur. In this case, the probability of winning the first prize in BB/RB in which nine medals are paid out is approximately 1/3.00, as described above, and the average number of consecutive games during the third RB state (average staying games) is approximately 1/3.00. number) is about 30 games, which is longer than the first RB state and the second RB state.

As described above, the probability of winning the AT mode can be varied by varying the winning rate of the small role during the transition to the RB state. In this case, the first role among BB and RB is set as the winning role that generates a medal payout, and the second role among BB and RB and the third role among BB and RB that are not eligible for medal payout are set as the other winning roles, and the number of continued games is varied as described above by increasing or decreasing the winning probability of these roles. In this way, it is possible to vary the number of continued games with a relatively simple configuration, such as simply adjusting the winning probability of these first role among BB and RB to the third role among BB and RB, and it is possible to vary the winning rate of the AT mode without varying the number of medals paid out during the RB state minus the number of medals used in each game.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, a modification of the performance during the RB state will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the RB production process in this modification. The RB effect processing is executed in the display control device 81, for example, as one process in step S2718 of the full stop effect setting process (FIG. 62) at the end of each game.

In step S3601, by grasping the result of the current game stop, it is determined whether or not an RB win has been achieved. If an RB win has been achieved, the process proceeds to step S3602, and it is determined whether or not an RB win has been achieved during CZ mode. If not during CZ mode, a process for setting the normal RB start effect is performed in step S3603. In the normal RB start effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "REGULAR-BONUS". In addition, in the normal RB start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male voice saying "Yeeshaa!"). After that, in step S3604, a process for setting a normal effect flag is performed in the various flag storage area 183a, and then this RB effect process is terminated. The normal effect flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to grasp that a normal effect will be performed as the effect during the current RB state.

If it is determined in step S3602 that it is an RB winning in the CZ mode, the process advances to step S3605. In step S3605, processing for determining the number of continuations of the CZ mode is executed. Then, in step S3606, it is determined whether the current number of continuous CZ modes is 20 or more games, that is, whether or not the current RB winning will ensure that the number of continuous CZ modes will reach 30. judge. If the number of continuations in the CZ mode is 20 or more games, the process advances to step S3607 to perform a process of setting an AT winning RB start effect. In the AT winning RB start performance, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the words "REGULAR-BONUS" and the words "AT confirmed." In addition, in the AT winning RB start performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male voice saying, "We did it, AT confirmed!!"). After that, in step S3608, a process is executed to set a winning effect flag in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then the present RB effect process is ended. The winning performance flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that an AT winning performance will be performed as a performance during the current RB state.

If it is determined in step S3606 that the number of continuations in CZ mode has not reached 20 games, the process proceeds to step S3609. In step S3609, the number of remaining games up to the ceiling of CZ mode, which is 30 games, is determined by subtracting the minimum number of games in the RB state based on the currently won RB, and the determined number of remaining games is input to the remaining counter provided in the various counter area 183b. For example, if the number of continuations in CZ mode at the time of winning the RB is 17 games, the number of games up to the ceiling is 13 games, and "3", which corresponds to 3 games minus the minimum number of games in the RB state, which is 10 games, is input to the remaining counter. Then, in step S3610, a process is performed to set the RB start performance for the AT chance.

In the AT chance RB start performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 89(a), a battle start performance is performed in which a main character of a military man holding a weapon is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 89(b), the display changes to the main character's line of sight, and a battle effect is performed in which a plurality of zombies as enemy characters attack the main character. In the battle performance, in addition to the enemy characters, an enemy number display indicating the number of enemy characters is displayed side by side with the enemy characters. The enemy number display is composed of, for example, the number of defeated enemy characters and the number of enemy characters at the start, and corresponds to the remaining counter input in step S3609. For example, if the value input to the remaining counter in step S3609 is "5", the number of enemy characters at the start is 5, the number of defeated enemy characters is 0, and the enemy number display is "0/ 5" is displayed. In addition, in the AT chance RB start performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male voice saying "Start the battle!! Defeat the enemy!!"). Thereafter, in step S3611, a process of setting a chance effect flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed, and then the present RB effect process is ended. The chance performance flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that an AT chance performance will be performed as a performance during the current RB state.

If it is determined in step S3601 that RB winning has not been achieved in the current game, the process advances to step S3612. In step S3612, it is determined whether the current game is already in the RB state. If it is not in the RB state, the RB effect processing is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the player is in the RB state, the process proceeds to step S3613, and it is determined whether or not the normal performance flag is set, that is, whether or not the player is in the RB state where he or she won a prize other than in the CZ mode. . If the normal effect flag is set, in step S3614, the normal RB effect is set to be performed (so that the same effect will be performed in the next game), and then the main RB effect is set. Finish the process. In the normal RB medium performance, for example, a predetermined animation performance is performed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a predetermined music piece).

If it is determined in step S3613 that the normal effect flag is not set, the process advances to step S3615. In step S3615, it is determined whether the winning effect flag is set. If the flag for winning effect is set, in step S3616, the AT winning effect is set to be performed during the RB (so that the effect will be performed in the next game as well), and then the effect for this RB is set. Finish the production process. In the AT winning RB medium production, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays a predetermined live-action video production, and the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a popular song sung by a woman). .

A negative judgment is made in step S3615 when the chance performance flag is set and the battle start performance and in-battle performance are performed when the RB is won. In this case, in step S3617, settings are made so that the AT chance RB performance is performed (so that the performance is performed in the next game as well). In the AT chance RB performance, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled so that the above-mentioned in-battle performance is performed.

In the next step S3618, it is determined whether or not a specific role has been won based on the result of the current game being stopped. A specific role refers to a role that has a smaller or no payout number than the main payout role (BB/RB first role) among the lottery results in the RB state, or a role that is not eligible for payout (replay, etc.). In this embodiment, the above-mentioned BB/RB second role and BB/RB third role correspond to a specific role that is not eligible for payout as the 9th replay or the 10th replay. That is, in step S3618, it is determined whether or not the result of the current game is a 9th replay win or a 10th replay win. If a win of the first minor role equivalent to the BB/RB first role, rather than the 9th replay win or the 10th replay win, the RB performance process is terminated as it is. If a specific role win of the 9th replay or the 10th replay has been won, proceed to step S3619.

In step S3619, settings are made so that a chance effect is performed. In the chance effect, for example, the display content of the enemy number display is updated in response to winning a specific role, and a damage imparting effect showing how a corresponding number of enemy characters have been defeated is performed on the auxiliary display section 65. Set. In the damage imparting effect, as shown in Figure 90(a), a scene is displayed in which some of the multiple enemy characters are blown away backwards, and a congratulatory sound of "NICE!!" is displayed. The text will be displayed. The display content of the number of enemies is updated so that the number of defeated enemy characters is added each time a specific winning combination is won.

In the next step S3620, the remaining counter is decremented by 1 in response to the winning of a specific combination. Then, in step S3621, it is determined whether the remaining counter has reached 0. If it has not reached 0, the RB presentation process ends. In this case, as shown in FIG. 90(b), the in-battle presentation in the AT chance RB presentation continues with the enemy count display updated.

If it is determined in step S3621 that the remaining counter is 0, then in step S3622, the AT winning effect is set to be performed. In the AT winning effect, as shown in FIG. 91(a), the main character, a soldier, is shown roaring as a battle winning effect, and the word "WIN" is displayed to indicate that the main character has won. When the battle winning effect is executed, the enemy count display is "5/5" to indicate that the number of defeated enemy characters has reached the number of enemy characters at the start of the battle. Then, in step S3623, the chance effect flag is cleared, and the winning effect flag is set, and the RB effect process is terminated. In this case, in the next process, a positive determination is made in step S3615, and the AT winning RB effect is set.

Incidentally, if the maximum number of payouts in the RB state is reached without the remaining counter reaching 0, a battle defeat performance may be performed as an ending performance in the RB state. As shown in FIG. 91(b), the battle defeat effect is such that the main character, a soldier, is shown lying face down, and the words "LOSE" are displayed, indicating that the main character has been defeated. be exposed.

Furthermore, the enemy number display does not have to correspond one-to-one to the remaining counter. For example, if the number of enemy characters at the start is 100, regardless of the value of the remaining counter, the number of enemies at the start The display may be "0/100" and the number of defeated enemy characters may be subtracted at a rate according to the value of the remaining counter.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to generate effects in which the player is attacked by an enemy character as the bonus progresses (as the number of games remaining in the bonus decreases).

In this way, in a configuration where the RB state ends when the payout upper limit is reached, if the result is different from the main payout result (first combination for BB/RB, predetermined combination) during the RB state, and the main payout result is If the number of medals paid out at the time of winning is smaller than the result, or no medals are paid out, or a winning of a specific role (second role for BB/RB, third role for BB/RB) as a result of not being eligible for payout. If established, the number of games played during the RB state is extended by that amount. In other words, when an RB prize is won during the CZ mode, the player can approach the ceiling of 30 games in the CZ mode by the amount of the specific winning combination.

When an RB is won, the system determines how many times a specific combination must be won during that RB state to reach the ceiling of the CZ mode, and displays the number of enemies based on this determination, allowing the player to clearly understand the number of times a specific combination must be won to reach the ceiling of the CZ mode. And because the enemy number display is updated based on the winning of a specific combination, it is easier for the player to experience the change in the state of approaching the ceiling of the CZ mode.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, the configuration is such that it is possible to win either a result with a large number of medals paid out or a result with a small number of medals paid out during the RB state. FIG. 92(a) is a diagram showing a part of the RB state lottery table in this modification.

In this modification, in addition to the 1st to 3rd BB/RB combinations with index values IV = 29 to 31 during the RB state, you can win the push order bell with index values IV = 21 to 28. The configuration is such that it can be obtained. As already explained, when the push order bell is won, depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the first minor winning prize, in which nine medals are paid out, or the first minor prize, in which three medals are paid out, is established. The 2nd minor role to the 26th minor role may be won, or a failure may occur where no medals are paid out (transitional rolls may stop).

Figure 92(b) shows a case where all the push order bells are won in each game in the RB state, a case where the first small prize is achieved in all games, and a case where the second small prize is achieved in all games. It conceptually shows the difference in the number of games in the RB state compared to the case where winnings are achieved.

That is, for example, in the RB state that started at timing ta, if the first small winning combination is achieved in all games, nine medals will be paid out in each game, so the upper limit number of payouts in the RB state It takes 10 games to reach 90 cards. That is, the RB state ends at timing tb, which is 10 games after timing ta. In this case, the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode fall lottery are restarted at timing tb.

On the other hand, in the RB state that started at the timing of ta, if any of the 2nd to 26th minor winning combinations are achieved in all games, 3 medals will be paid out in each game, so it will take 30 games to reach the upper limit of 90 medals that can be paid out in the RB state. In other words, the RB state ends at the timing of tc, which is 30 games after the timing of ta. In this case, the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode fall lottery will resume at the timing of tc.

In this way, in a configuration where the lottery results of each game in the RB state include a result with a large number of payouts and a result with a smaller number of payouts, the number of games in the RB state differs depending on which result wins. Fewer results result in more games.

During the RB state, the game is played as a 3-bet game, so if any of the 2nd to 26th minor roles wins and 3 medals are paid out, no medal increase will occur. do not have. In other words, if any of the 2nd minor winnings to the 26th minor winnings are won in all games as described above, even if the maximum number of medals paid out is 90, in the RB state. The actual number of medals that can be acquired is 0, and no increase in medals is expected.

In other words, from the perspective of winning medals in RB state, it is preferable to win a prize with a large payout amount in each game, and from the perspective of playing the number of games up to the ceiling of CZ mode in RB state, it is preferable to win a prize with a small payout amount in each game. In this way, it is easy to win the AT mode even if the number of wins is small, and it is difficult to win the AT mode but the number of wins is large, so by making the two extreme events mutually support each other, it is possible to optimize the balance of the game.

As already explained, if the push order bell is won during the AT mode, a push order notification of the operation sequence corresponding to the first small win occurs. On the other hand, if the push order bell is won in the CZ mode or normal mode, no push order notification occurs. If this modified example is applied to a configuration in which push order notification is possible during the RB state, if the RB state occurs during the AT mode, a push order notification can occur during the RB state. In other words, the first small win can be achieved in each game, and the RB state ends in about 10 games. On the other hand, if the RB state occurs during the CZ mode, no push order notification occurs during the RB state. Therefore, the first small win can be achieved in each game, or any of the second small win to the 26th small win can be achieved, and the RB state can be longer than 10 games. Therefore, in AT mode, the RB state is a state in which you can expect to win medals, and in CZ mode, you can expect to transition to AT mode rather than win medals, so even if you are in the same RB state, the effect will be different depending on the situation in which you transition.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, depending on the type of bonus, whether or not there is a restriction on the lottery regarding the instruction function during the bonus state is made different. FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of each bonus.

As explained in the first embodiment above, in the first BB, the "Red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. It is set so that winning will be achieved by doing so. The chances of winning are a double win with a so-called rare role such as strong cherry double 1st prize (IV = 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 44), special reply A double 1 (IV = 46), Toku Reply AB Duplication 1 (IV = 47) and Single Winning (IV = 59) are set, and among these, the setting difference in winning probability is set for Toku Reply AB Duplicate 1. There are no other differences in the winning probabilities (Figure 37).

As explained in the first embodiment above, the second BB is set so that a win is established when the "white BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. The winning chances are set to be a double win with a so-called rare role such as a strong cherry double win (IV = 33, 35, 37, 39, 41, 43, 45), a special lip A double win (IV = 48), a special lip AB double win (IV = 49), and a single win (IV = 60). Of these, the only ones with a set difference in the winning probability are a double win with a rare role and a special lip AB double win, and there is no set difference in the winning probability for the others (Figure 37).

Furthermore, regarding RB, as explained in the first embodiment above, the "Black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R are on the active line. It is set so that a prize is won when the game stops at . The chances of winning are a double win with a so-called rare role such as Strong Cherry Duplicate 3 (IV = 50 to 56), Toku Reply A Duplicate 3 (IV = 57), and Toku Reply AB Duplicate 3 (IV = 58) and single winning (IV = 61), and among these, the winning probabilities have different settings for duplicate winning with rare role and special reply AB duplicate 3, and for other There is no setting difference in the probability of winning (Figure 37).

In this embodiment, in a bonus state that is triggered by a result in which a setting difference is set in these winning probabilities, the execution of a lottery related to the instruction function is restricted, and in a bonus state that is triggered by a result in which a setting difference is set in these winning probabilities, In the bonus state, the lottery regarding the instruction function is allowed to be executed. In the following description, a bonus that restricts the execution of a lottery related to the instruction function will be referred to as a restricted bonus, and a bonus that allows the execution of a lottery related to the instruction function will be referred to as a non-restricted bonus.

In other words, in the first BB, the first BB state triggered by a double win with a rare role, special lip A double 1, or a single win is a non-restricted bonus, while the first BB state triggered by special lip AB double 1 is a restricted bonus. In the second BB, the second BB state triggered by special lip A double 2 or a single win is a non-restricted bonus, while the second BB state triggered by a double win with a rare role or special lip AB double 2 is a restricted bonus. In the RB, the RB state triggered by special lip A double 3 or a single win is a non-restricted bonus, while the RB state triggered by a double win with a rare role or special lip AB double 3 is a restricted bonus.

In the restricted bonus in the CZ mode, not only the transition lottery to the AT mode but also the falling lottery are restricted as the lottery related to the instruction function, as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the case of non-restricted bonuses in the CZ mode, implementation of the transition lottery to the AT mode and the fall lottery regarding the instruction function are permitted.

In this embodiment, a new type of gameplay is created by utilizing a configuration that combines limited and non-limited bonuses.

In this embodiment, the lottery for the instruction function during the non-restricted bonus is triggered by, for example, the second combination of BB or RB or the third combination of BB or RB, and the probability of winning is arbitrary.

Figure 94 is a flowchart showing the process for setting up the bonus winning notification effect in this embodiment.

In step S3701, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode is in effect. If the CZ mode is not in effect, the bonus type is identified in step S3702, and a winning notification effect corresponding to the identified bonus type is set in step S3703. The processing in steps S3701 to S3703 is the same as the processing in steps S3301 to S3303 described above.

If it is determined in step S3701 that the mode is CZ mode, the process advances to step S3704, and similarly to step S3304 described above, processing for determining the bonus type is executed. Then, in step S3705, it is determined whether it is an RB. If it is not RB but the first BB or the second BB, the process advances to step S3703, and a winning notification effect corresponding to the bonus type is set. That is, in this embodiment, when the won bonus is the first BB or the second BB, the same winning notification effect occurs regardless of whether the CZ mode is in progress or not. In this embodiment, when the first BB or the second BB is won, the AT mode first prize notification effect does not occur.

If it is determined in step S3705 that an RB has been won, the process proceeds to step S3706, and processing is performed to set the winning notification effect according to the number of times the CZ mode continues in steps S3706 to S3710. The processing in steps S3706 to S3710 is the same as the processing in steps S3307 to S3311.

Although detailed explanations using figures will be omitted, in this embodiment, when a transition to the first BB state or the second BB state occurs during the CZ mode, along with the bonus performance in the first BB state or the second BB state, A CZ mode performance will be performed. For example, in a display performance as a bonus performance by the auxiliary display section 65, by displaying "CZ mode in progress" at the top or bottom end of the auxiliary display section 65, or by changing the background color of the display direction, it is possible to display the display performance as a bonus performance. Even in this case, the configuration is such that it gives the impression that the camera is in CZ mode.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing CZ mode processing in this embodiment. In the process for CZ mode in this embodiment, in particular, the process when winning a falling lottery during a non-limited bonus, and the lottery according to the number of continuations of the CZ mode in a non-limited bonus are carried out during the bonus state. This processing is different from the first embodiment described above.

That is, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the fallen flag is set, and if it is set, the process proceeds to step S3802. In step S3802, a process is executed to clear the CZ mode flag, and in step S3803, a process is executed to determine whether or not the bonus state is being executed. If the bonus state is not being executed, in step S3804, a process is executed to set the CZ mode end command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the process for this CZ mode is terminated. In this case, as described above, a CZ mode end notification effect is generated in the game following the game in question.

If it is determined in step S3803 that the player is in the bonus state, it means that he or she has won the falling lottery during the non-restricted bonus. In this case, in step S3805, a process is executed to set the BB mid-BB CZ mode end command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the present CZ mode process is ended. The CZ mode end command during BB is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the CZ mode has ended during the bonus state. Regarding the processing of the display control device 81 that receives the CZ mode end command during BB, a detailed explanation using figures will be omitted. 65, speaker 64, etc. Further, when the CZ mode ends, control is performed so that the performance in the CZ mode does not end. For example, based on the reception of the CZ mode end command during BB, the CPU 181 sets a flag in the various flag storage area 183a to specify that the command has been received, and by checking the flag, the CZ mode is completed. It is preferable to continue the performance in the mode and to determine whether or not to generate the CZ mode end notification performance based on the presence or absence of the flag at the end of the bonus.

If it is determined in step S3801 that the fall-off flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S3806. In step S3806, an addition process is performed for the number of CZ mode continuations. Then, in step S3807, a process is performed to determine whether the number of CZ mode continuations is the number of continuations (19) that will trigger a fall-off lottery to be executed in the next game, and if so, a process is performed to set the fall-off lottery flag in step S3808, and then the process for CZ mode is terminated. If the number of continuations is not the number of continuations that will trigger a fall-off lottery to be executed, in step S3809, a process is performed to determine whether the number of CZ mode continuations is the number of continuations (29) that will determine whether the AT mode lottery will be won in the next game. If so, in step S3810, a process is performed to determine whether any bonus is being carried over. If the bonus is not being carried over, in step S3811, a process is performed to determine whether a limited bonus is being executed.

If it is not in the bonus state, or if it is a non-restricted bonus rather than a restricted bonus even if it is in the bonus state, the process advances to step S3812 and executes the AT mode winning process (steps S3812 to S3814). The processing from step S3812 to step S3814 is similar to the processing from step S3109 to step S3911. Thereafter, in step S3815, the notification postponement command is output to the display control device 81, and then the process ends. The notification postponement command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to understand that the winning of the AT mode transition lottery occurred during the bonus state. Regarding the processing of the display control device 81 that has received the notification postponement command, a detailed explanation using figures will be omitted, but the auxiliary display unit 65 and Controls the speaker 64 etc. Further, when the AT mode is won, if the AT mode is in the CZ mode, control is performed so that the performance in the CZ mode does not end. For example, based on the reception of a notification postponement command, the CPU 181 sets a flag in the various flag storage area 183a to specify that the command has been received, and by checking the flag, the CPU 181 sets a flag to specify that the command has been received. It is preferable to continue the performance and to determine whether or not to generate the AT mode winning notification performance based on the presence or absence of the flag at the end of the bonus.

If the number of continuations in CZ mode is not 29 in step S3809, the CZ processing ends as it is. Also, even if the number of continuations in CZ mode is 29, if there is a bonus carryover state in step S3810 or if there is a limited bonus in step S3811, the CZ mode processing ends as it is without executing the processing for winning the AT mode.

Next, the AT mode lottery process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 96.

In step S3901, it is determined whether the end CZ flag is set. As already explained, the end CZ flag is a flag that is set in step S1721 when the CZ mode flag is set in the bonus end game (FIG. 50).

If the end CZ flag is not set, it is determined in step S3902 whether any bonus is carried over. If no bonus is being carried over, it is determined in step S3903 whether or not a restricted bonus is being carried over. If you are not in a bonus state, or if you are in a non-restricted bonus state even if you are in a bonus state, a negative determination is made in step S3903, and the process advances to step S3904, where the process for falling lottery and AT mode lottery Execute the process.

That is, in step S3904, it is determined whether or not the falling lottery flag is set, and if it is set, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game is a transition trigger (step S3905). ). If it is not the transition trigger, execute the CZ mode fall lottery (step S3906), and if the fall is won (step S3907: YES), execute the process of setting the fall completed flag (step S3906). S3908), the AT mode lottery process ends.

On the other hand, if the fall flag is not set (step S3904: NO), if the transition trigger is won (step S3905: YES), or if the fall is not won (step S3907: NO), the AT mode transition lottery (Step S3909). These processes from step S3904 to step S3909 are similar to the processes from step S3203 to step S3208 described above.

After executing the AT mode transition lottery in step S3909, it is determined in step S3910 whether or not the AT mode transition lottery has been won. If the lottery has been won, in step S3911, a process is executed to set the notification postponement command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT mode lottery process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3910 that the AT mode has not been won, the AT mode lottery process is immediately terminated. Incidentally, the processing of steps S3910 to S3911 may be configured to be executed in 812 of the first specific combination processing.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3901, the process advances to step S3912. In step S3912, it is determined whether the bonus for which the end CZ flag is set is a restricted bonus. Note that this determination is made by determining the bonus when setting the CZ flag at the end, and setting a flag corresponding to information as to whether or not it is a restricted bonus in the various flag storage areas 106d. It is preferable to configure this by checking the flag. If it is a restricted bonus, it is determined in step S3913 whether the number of CZ mode continuations is 29 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S3912 or step S3913, the process advances to step S3902 and performs normal AT mode lottery processing. The processing from step S3913 to step S3916 is similar to the processing from step S3209 to step S3212 described above.

In the case of the above-described processing configuration, the aspect of winning notification in the AT mode after the CZ mode in this embodiment will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 96 to 100.

First, we will explain how the AT mode winning notification occurs when the number of CZ mode continuations reaches 30 during a restricted bonus.

During the CZ mode started at timing t31, if a bonus is won at timing t32, execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted while the bonus is carried over until timing t33. Further, even if a bonus win is established at the timing t33, since the bonus is a restricted bonus, execution of the AT mode transition lottery remains restricted. Then, at timing t34, even if the number of continuations in the CZ mode reaches the number that triggers the start of the fall lottery, the fall lottery is not started because the restricted bonus is in progress. In addition, even if the number of consecutive CZ modes reaches the number that will confirm the winning of AT mode at the timing of t35, the winning of AT mode will not be confirmed because the bonus is subject to restriction, and the winning of CZ mode will not be confirmed. continue. Thereafter, when the bonus ends at timing t36, an AT mode transition lottery is carried out, and AT mode transition is determined based on the number of CZ mode continuations. This point is similar to the first embodiment described above. In this embodiment, as described above, when notifying the BB winning, the AT mode first winning notification effect is not performed. The AT mode winning notification effect is set to occur in the next game after the game at t36 where the bonus state ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the CZ mode presentation continues even during the bonus state. Therefore, when the CZ mode starts at the timing of t31, the presentation during the CZ mode also starts, and when a bonus is won at t32 or a bonus is won at t33, the presentation during the CZ mode continues without ending. The presentation during the CZ mode continues until the bonus ends at t36.

Next, we will explain how to notify the winner of the AT mode lottery when the player wins the lottery to switch to the AT mode during a non-restricted bonus.

During the CZ mode started at timing t41, if a bonus is won at timing t42, execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted during the bonus carryover state up to timing t43. This point is the same for both restricted bonuses and non-restricted bonuses. On the other hand, if a bonus win is established at the timing t43, since the bonus is a non-restricted bonus, execution of the AT mode transition lottery is permitted. Furthermore, if the number of continuations in the CZ mode reaches the number that triggers the start of the fall lottery at timing t44, the fall lottery is started since the non-restricted bonus is in progress. For example, if you win the AT mode transition lottery at timing t45, which is before the number of continuations in CZ mode reaches the number that determines the AT mode winning, the CZ mode will end at the same timing t45. do. However, in this case, since a notification postponement command is output, the performance in CZ mode is continued. Even if the provisional number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches 30 at timing t46, the CZ mode has already ended, and the winning of the AT mode has already been confirmed. Then, when the bonus state of the non-restricted bonus ends at timing t47, the performance in the CZ mode ends and AT mode winning notification occurs in the next game after the bonus state game. In other words, in the restricted bonus, the performance mode is the same as the case where the AT mode winning is determined based on the number of continuations of the CZ mode.

Next, we will explain how to notify the winner in AT mode when the number of continuations in CZ mode reaches 30 during a non-restricted bonus.

In the CZ mode started at the timing of t51, if a bonus is won at the timing of t52, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted during the bonus carryover state until the timing of t53. If a bonus is won at the timing of t53, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is permitted since the bonus is a non-restricted bonus. Also, if the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches the number that triggers the start of the fall lottery at the timing of t54, the fall lottery starts since it is during a non-restricted bonus. For example, if neither the fall lottery nor the AT mode transition lottery is won until the timing of t55 when the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches the number that determines the winning of the AT mode, the AT mode is determined based on the number of continuations of the CZ mode at the timing of t55. In this case, the CZ mode ends at the timing of t55. However, in this case, the notification postponement command is output, so the performance during the CZ mode continues. Then, when the bonus state of the non-restricted bonus ends at timing t56, the presentation in CZ mode ends and an AT mode winning notification occurs in the next game after the bonus state game. In other words, the presentation is the same as when the AT mode is confirmed as a winning result based on the number of CZ mode continuations in the limited bonus, and further, the presentation is the same as when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the non-restricted bonus, rather than the number of CZ mode continuations.

Next, a description will be given of notification when a player wins a falling lottery during a non-restricted bonus.

During the CZ mode started at timing t61, if a bonus is won at timing t62, execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted during the bonus carryover state up to timing t63. If a bonus win is established at the timing t63, since the bonus is a non-restricted bonus, execution of the AT mode transition lottery is permitted. Moreover, if the number of continuations in the CZ mode reaches the number that triggers the start of the falling lottery at timing t64, the falling lottery is started since the non-restricted bonus is in progress. For example, if the player wins the fall lottery at timing t65, which is before the number of continuations in the CZ mode reaches the number at which winning in the AT mode is confirmed, the CZ mode ends at the timing t65. However, in this case, since the CZ mode end command during BB is output, the performance during CZ mode is continued. Even if the provisional number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches 30 at timing t66, the AT mode winning is not confirmed because the CZ mode has already ended. Then, when the bonus state of the non-restricted bonus ends at timing t67, the performance in the CZ mode ends, and a CZ mode end notification performance occurs in the next game of the bonus state game. In other words, in this case, until the end of the bonus, it is difficult to determine not only whether or not the AT mode has been won, but also whether or not the CZ mode is actually continuing, based on the performance mode.

As described above, the types of bonus states are limited bonuses, which have a difference in the probability of winning depending on the set value, and non-limited bonuses, which have no difference in the probability of winning depending on the set value. In the limited bonuses, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode fall lottery during the bonus state is restricted, while in the non-limited bonuses, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode fall lottery during the bonus state is permitted. Therefore, even in the first BB or second BB, where a 30-game bonus state can be executed, the AT mode win based on the number of CZ mode continuations during that bonus state is not confirmed, and it is possible to provide an interesting gameplay in which the player hopes for an AT mode win while predicting whether the bonus type is a limited bonus or a non-limited bonus.

In particular, for non-restricted bonuses, AT mode lotteries can be held even during the bonus state, and the winning notification in the event of winning the AT mode lottery during this bonus state is made in the same manner as the winning notification for AT mode based on the number of CZ mode continuations for restricted bonuses, so there are more prediction branches for the AT mode winning path, improving the playability of making those predictions. Also, since it becomes difficult to distinguish between restricted and non-restricted bonuses, it becomes difficult to grasp the appearance rate of restricted bonuses, which have different winning probabilities depending on the set value. As a result, even in games where the set value is predicted, there are more prediction branches, improving the playability.

<Modification>
In this modification, depending on the winning combination of the BB winning game, the continuation of the CZ mode presentation in the limited bonus or non-limited bonus, and the postponement of the AT mode winning notification presentation are different. Fig. 101 is a flowchart showing the winning game winning result response process in this modification. The winning game winning result response process is a process that is performed every time the winning result response process (Fig. 48) is started.

In step S4001, it is determined whether or not the game is a bonus winning game. More specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 1st BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag, and RB winning flag have been set in the current game. If none of the winning flags have been set, or if they have been set but have already been set in a previous game (carried over state), this winning result response process ends.

If it is a bonus winning game, proceed to step S4002. In step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is in CZ mode. If it is not in CZ mode, this winning result response process is terminated. If it is a bonus winning game in CZ mode, proceed to step S4003.

In step S4003, it is determined whether the first BB winning flag is set. If the first BB winning flag is set, in step S4004, it is determined whether the 9th replay winning is established as the winning result of this game. If the 9th replay winning is established, that is, if the first BB winning opportunity this time is a special lip A overlap 1 or a special lip AB overlap 1 (FIG. 93), proceed to step S4005, execute a process to set the CZ mode performance continuation command as an output target to the display control device 81, execute a process to set the AT winning notification end time command as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4006, and then terminate this winning result response process. The display control device 81 that has received the CZ mode continuation command sets the CZ mode being executed to continue, and controls the CZ mode being executed to continue at least until the bonus end game, even if the CZ mode ends due to the AT mode winning being confirmed during the current bonus state, or the CZ mode ends due to winning the CZ mode fall lottery. The display control device 81 that has received the AT winning notification end command controls the AT mode winning notification effect not to occur during the bonus state, but to occur when the bonus ends, even if the AT mode winning is confirmed during the current bonus state. In other words, as shown in the second embodiment above, the CZ mode effect continues during the bonus state, and the AT mode winning or losing (whether or not the CZ mode has ended) is determined after the bonus ends.

If it is determined in step S4004 that the 9th replay win has not been achieved, it is determined in step S4007 whether or not the 10th replay win has been achieved as the winning result of the current game. If the 10th re-game winning has not been achieved, that is, if the current 1st BB winning opportunity is other than special rep AB duplication 1, the process advances to step S4008, and a CZ mode performance continuation command is output to the display control device 81. In step S4009, the AT winning notification winning time command is set as the target to be output to the display control device 81, and then the winning result handling process ends. The mode of the display control device 81 that has received the CZ mode production continuation command is as described above. The display control device 81 that has received the AT winning notification command is configured to generate an AT mode winning notification effect in the game where the AT mode winning is confirmed if the AT mode winning is confirmed during the bonus state. Control. In addition, when the AT winning notification winning time command is received, the performance in the CZ mode is configured to end based on the generation of the AT mode winning notification performance. That is, during the bonus state, the CZ mode effect continues, and when the AT mode winning is confirmed, the AT mode winning notification effect occurs in that game, and the CZ mode effect also ends.

If the 10th re-game winning is established in step S4007, that is, if the current 1st BB winning opportunity is special reply AB duplication 1, the process advances to step S4010. In step S4010, processing is executed to set the CZ mode effect end command as an output target to the display control device 81. Then, in step S4011, a process is executed to set the AT winning notification prize command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the main winning result corresponding process is ended. The display control device 81 that has received the CZ mode performance end command performs control to end the CZ mode performance that is being executed. When receiving the AT winning notification winning command, the display control device 81 grasps the number of consecutive games in the winning bonus state at the time of winning the bonus, and if the number of consecutive games in the CZ mode reaches 30 during the bonus state. generates an AT mode first prize notification effect when the bonus is won. That is, the CZ mode effect ends based on the bonus win, and the AT mode first win notification effect can occur.

If it is determined in step S4003 that the first BB winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S4012. In step S4012, a process is executed to determine whether or not the second BB winning flag is set. If the 2nd BB winning flag is set and it is a 2nd BB winning game, the process advances to step S4013, and the winning result of the current game is the 9th replay winning result, or the so-called missed result in which no winning result was established. Determine whether or not. If it is the result of the 9th re-gaming winning or losing, and it is not possible to narrow down the winning opportunity for the current 2nd BB winning, the process advances to step S4014, and the above CZ mode performance continuation command is output to the display control device 81. At the same time, in step S4015, a process is executed to set the AT winning notification end command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the process corresponding to the winning result is ended. In this case, as shown in the second embodiment, the CZ mode performance continues during the bonus state, and whether or not the AT mode is appropriate (whether or not the CZ mode ends) is determined after the bonus ends.

Also, if the result of step S4012 is negative and the current game is an RB winning game, the process proceeds to step S4014, the CZ mode presentation continues during the bonus state, and processing is performed so that the AT mode success or failure (whether or not the CZ mode has ended) can be determined after the bonus ends.

If the result of step S4013 is negative, proceed to step S4016 to determine whether the winning result of this game is the 10th replay winning or the rare role winning. If the result of step S4013 is negative and the winning result is not the 10th replay winning or the rare role winning, that is, if the winning result of this game is the 2nd BB winning, proceed to step S4017. In step S4017, the CZ mode presentation continuation command is set as the output target to the display control device 81. Then, in step S4018, a process is executed to set the AT winning notification winning command as the output target to the display control device 81, and then this winning result response process is terminated. In this case, as described above, the CZ mode presentation continues during the bonus state, and when the AT mode winning is confirmed, the AT mode winning notification presentation occurs in that game, and the CZ mode presentation also ends.

If it is determined in step S4016 that it is the 10th re-game win or rare combination win, the process advances to step S4019, where the CZ mode performance end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and at the same time, in step S4020, AT win is determined. After executing the process of setting the notification winning command as an output target to the display control device 81, this winning result corresponding process is ended. In this case, as described above, the CZ mode performance ends based on the bonus win, and the AT mode first prize notification performance can occur.

In this way, the presentation content during the bonus state differs depending on the winning mode (stopping outcome) in the bonus winning game during CZ mode. Figure 102 shows the relationship between the winning mode (stopping outcome) in the bonus winning game and whether the CZ mode presentation continues, and the timing of the AT winning notification.

As already explained, the first BB is won when the "red 7" symbols line up and stop on an active line, and the second BB is won when the "white BAR" symbols line up and stop on an active line. Therefore, the player can clearly understand which bonus it is from the winning pattern. The first BB and the second BB are set to single winning roles and overlapping winning roles, and the overlapping winning roles are overlapping roles with rare roles such as strong cherries and strong watermelons (strong cherry overlap 1, 2, strong watermelon overlap 1, 2, etc.), special lip A overlap 1, 2 which is an overlapping role with the 9th replay, and special lip AB overlap 1, 2 which is an overlapping role with the 9th replay and the 10th replay.

The single winning role and the special lip A overlaps 1 and 2 are set so that there is no difference in the winning probability for either the first BB or the second BB, and the first BB and second BB triggered by these roles are non-restricted bonuses where the lottery for the instruction function is not restricted. Also, for the special lip AB overlaps 1 and 2, there is a set difference in the winning probability for either the first BB or the second BB, and the first BB and second BB triggered by these roles are restricted bonuses where the lottery for the instruction function is restricted.

In contrast, for overlapping roles with rare roles, the first BB is set so that there is no difference in the winning probability, and the first BB triggered by that role is a non-restricted bonus, while the second BB has a set difference in the winning probability, and the second BB triggered by that role is a restricted bonus.

As described above, in the case of a restricted bonus that has been transferred to the CZ mode, although the execution of the process of adding up the number of continuations in the CZ mode is allowed, the execution of the AT mode transfer lottery and the fall lottery is restricted. In other words, when a notification regarding the validity of the AT mode is generated for the limited bonus, the winning of the AT mode is notification of the winning based on the number of consecutive CZ modes. On the other hand, in the case of a non-restricted bonus that has been transferred to the CZ mode, execution of addition processing for the number of continuous CZ modes is permitted, and furthermore, execution of an AT mode transition lottery or a fall lottery is permitted. In other words, when a notification regarding the propriety of the AT mode is generated for a non-restricted bonus, the notification is not only about winning based on the number of CZ mode continuations, but also about winning based on the AT mode transition lottery and non-winning based on the falling lottery.

Comparing Tokurep A duplication 1 and 2, which are non-restricted bonuses, and Tokurep AB duplication 1 and 2, which are restricted bonuses, the 10th replay is set for Tokurep AB duplication 1 and 2, which is a restricted bonus. This is different from Special Reply A Duplication 1 and 2. As already explained, the stop control for each game is set so that if replays and bonuses are won at the same time, the replays are prioritized and won, and the replays are set so that no one misses out on the replays. The winning mode has been set. In that case, although it is impossible to determine whether the bonus is not subject to restrictions triggered by special reply A duplication 1 and 2 or whether it is a restricted bonus triggered by special reply AB duplication 1, if the 9th replay winning is established, It is possible to determine if the 10th re-game winning is established.

Here, in the 9th re-game and the 10th re-game, although the target symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are common, the target symbol on the left reel 32L is the "red bell" symbol in the 9th re-game. Or, it is a "white bell" symbol, and in the 10th re-game, a "youth" symbol is set. A total of six "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L, while only one "youth" symbol is arranged on the left reel 32L. Furthermore, on the left reel 32L, the "Young Man" symbol is placed at the 13th position, and the "White Bell" symbol is placed at the 12th position immediately below it and at the 15th position two places above it. Therefore, in a situation where you have won in both the 9th replay and the 10th replay, try to stop the target symbol of the 10th replay on the active line of the left reel 32L so that you win the 10th replay. If so, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at the timing when the 13th "Youth" symbol reaches the active line, and at other times, that is, from the 14th "1st Replay" symbol to the 12th "White" symbol. If the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "bell" symbol reaches the active line, the target symbol of the 9th re-game will stop instead of the target symbol of the 10th re-game.

Therefore, in the special rep AB duplication 1 and 2 winning games, which are duplicate roles with the 9th replay and the 10th replay, the 9th replay win is basically achieved, and the 10th replay win is daringly aimed at. The 10th re-gaming prize is established only when the stop operation is performed and the stop operation is successful. In that case, the stop rolls in the special reply A duplicate 1 and 2 winning game and the stop results in the special reply AB duplicate 1 and 2 winning game will basically be the same, and the bonus will be triggered by either winning combination. It is becoming difficult to distinguish between In other words, it is difficult to determine whether the bonus is a restricted bonus or a non-restricted bonus based on the number of stop results in the winning game, and if you purposely perform a stop operation to distinguish between these bonuses, or by chance that stop operation corresponds to the It is possible to determine that the bonus is a restricted bonus only if the bonus is

In this modified example, when the 9th replay win is established in the winning game of the first BB or second BB non-restricted bonus triggered by the special lip A overlap 1 or 2 win, that is, the non-restricted bonus, and when the 9th replay win is established in the winning game of the first BB or second BB restricted bonus triggered by the special lip AB overlap 1 or 2 win, the CZ mode presentation during the bonus state is continued, and the AT mode winning notification presentation is performed after the bonus state ends. Therefore, it is not possible to determine whether the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode fall lottery is being held during the bonus state from the CZ mode presentation or the AT mode winning notification presentation during the bonus state. By doing this, it is possible to diversify the winning opportunities of the AT mode transition lottery while deliberately making the winning opportunity itself difficult to understand, and to enjoy the presentation until the end.

On the other hand, if the 10th replay winning is established in the winning game of the limited bonus of the 1st BB or 2nd BB triggered by the special lip AB overlap 1, 2 winning, the bonus is determined to be a limited bonus. Therefore, in this case, the CZ mode presentation during the bonus state is not performed, and an AT mode winning notification presentation (first winning notification presentation) based on the CZ mode continuation number is generated at the time of the bonus winning. By doing so, even though it is determined that the bonus is a limited bonus, it is possible to avoid disappointing the player by performing a so-called pseudo presentation as if an AT mode transition lottery is being performed during the bonus state. Moreover, as described above, in the case where the 9th replay and the 10th replay are overlappingly won, a special stop operation is required to establish the 10th replay winning, which requires considerable skill, and it is considered that players with such skill often understand the specifications of the game, such as the bonus and the AT mode winning trigger. In other words, there is a high possibility that the pseudo presentation will be seen through. Therefore, as described above, if the 10th replay win is successful, the pseudo-presentation is deliberately not performed, so that the player does not feel disheartened when it is determined that the result is pseudo, and the pseudo-presentation effect can be optimally achieved.

Furthermore, if the winning opportunity for the first BB or second BB is a combination of a rare role, as described above, the first BB is a non-restricted bonus, and the second BB is a restricted bonus. Whether it is the first BB or the second BB can be easily determined by the difference in the winning mode, such as the matching of the "red 7" symbol or the "white BAR" symbol. In other words, if a rare role is won in a winning game and the state transitions to the first BB state, it is determined to be a non-restricted bonus, and if a rare role is won in a winning game and the state transitions to the second BB state, it is determined to be a restricted bonus. On the other hand, rare roles can be missed, and if a miss occurs in a winning game, it becomes difficult to determine whether the first BB or second BB is a single winning. In other words, if a miss occurs in a winning game and the state transitions to the first BB state, whether the miss occurs due to a combination with a rare role or a single win, the bonus is a non-restricted bonus. However, if a miss occurs in a winning game and the state transitions to the second BB state, it is impossible to tell whether the miss occurs due to a combination with a rare role or a non-restricted bonus due to a single win.

Therefore, for the first BB, if a rare combination wins in the winning game, if the first BB wins, or if a miss occurs, the bonus is a non-restricted bonus, so the presentation for the CZ mode continues, and the winning notification for the AT mode is notified at the time of winning. In this way, players can fully enjoy the thrilling gameplay of avoiding the drop-out lottery for the CZ mode during the non-restricted bonus and winning the lottery for transition to the AT mode.

And, for the second BB, if a rare role is won in the winning game, it is determined that the bonus is a limited bonus, so the performance for the CZ mode is not continued, and the winning notification for the AT mode is made at the time of the bonus winning (first winning notification performance), so that the pseudo performance is not disappointing because it is performed in a situation where it is determined that it is a pseudo performance. On the other hand, if a miss occurs in the winning game for the second BB, it is not possible to determine whether it is a single winning or a double winning with a rare role, and it is not possible to distinguish between a limited bonus and a non-limited bonus. Therefore, by continuing the performance for the CZ mode and making the winning notification for the AT mode at the end of the bonus, it is possible to preferably play the performance effect using the pseudo performance. And, for the second BB, if a second BB is won in the winning game, it is determined that the bonus is a non-limited bonus. In this case, the performance for the CZ mode is continued, and the winning notification for the AT mode is configured to be notified at the time of winning. This allows players to fully enjoy the gameplay of avoiding the drop-out lottery for CZ mode during the non-restricted bonus and winning the lottery for transition to AT mode.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, processing is performed according to the number of times that the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode fall lottery are limited. Fig. 103 is a flowchart showing the AT mode lottery processing in this embodiment. Note that this embodiment is based on the first embodiment, and will be described based on a configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode fall lottery are limited during any bonus state (even during the bonus carryover state), regardless of whether the bonus is limited or not.

In step S4101, it is determined whether the end CZ flag is set. If not set, the process advances to step S4102, and it is determined whether the bonus state or the bonus carryover state is in progress. If it is not in the bonus state or the bonus carryover state, the CZ mode fall lottery and the AT mode shift lottery in steps S4103 to S4108 are executed. The processing from step S4103 to step S4108 is similar to the processing from step S3203 to step S3208 described above.

If it is determined in step S4102 that the system is in a bonus state or a bonus carryover state, that is, in a restricted state in which the falling lottery in the CZ mode or the transition lottery in the AT mode is restricted, the process advances to step S4109. In step S4109, it is determined whether the fall lottery flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the falling lottery is restricted due to the restricted state, although the number of times the falling lottery should be held in terms of the number of continuations of the CZ mode is the number of times the falling lottery should be performed. If the fall lottery flag is set, it is determined in step S4110 whether or not the transition trigger combination has been won. If the fall lottery flag is set and the transition trigger combination has not been won, in step S4112, the process of adding up the fall lottery restriction counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The falling lottery restriction counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times the execution of the falling lottery in the CZ mode is restricted in the restricted state.

Even if the fall lottery flag is not set in step S4109, or if the fall lottery flag is set in step S4110, if the game result of this game is a win for the transition trigger role, the process proceeds to step S4112 after executing the increment process of the fall lottery limit counter in step S4111. In step S4112, the process executes the increment process of the transition lottery limit counter provided in the various counter area 106e, and then ends the AT mode lottery process. The transition lottery limit counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times that the execution of the AT mode transition lottery has been restricted in the restricted state.

In other words, in this embodiment, the number of times that the CZ mode drop lottery or the AT mode transition lottery is restricted in the restricted state is individually stored.

If the end CZ flag is set in step S4101 and the mode was CZ before the bonus transition, i.e., if the CZ mode flag is set at the end of the bonus, proceed to step S4113. In step S4113, a number of fall-down lotteries are executed corresponding to the value of the fall-down lottery limit counter. The winning probability (fall rate) of the fall-down lottery in this case may be the same as the winning probability of the fall-down lottery (step S4105) executed in each game, or may be a different (lower) winning probability.

More specifically, regarding step S4113, it is determined whether the fall lottery restriction counter is 1 or more, and if it is 1 or more, a process of executing one fall lottery and subtracting 1 from the fall lottery restriction counter is performed. Execute. If the fall lottery limit counter after the subtraction is 1 or more, one more fall lottery is executed and the process of subtracting 1 from the fall lottery limit counter is executed, such that the fall lottery limit counter is less than 1. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the falling lottery is repeated until the result is (0). Then, in step S4114, it is determined whether or not the player has won a lottery in any of the lottery games executed in step S4113. If the player has won by falling, the process advances to step S4115. It should be noted that the process may be configured to proceed to step S4115 at the time of winning in any of the falling lottery in step S4113. In step S4115, a process of setting a fallen flag is executed. That is, the same process as the falling lottery process (steps S4105 to S4107) that is executed in each game is executed. After executing the process of step S4115, the AT mode lottery process ends.

If it is determined in step S4114 that the winning result has not been won, the process advances to step S4116. In step S4116, the transfer lottery is executed the number of times corresponding to the value of the transfer lottery limit counter. The winning probability (fall rate) of the transition lottery in this case may be the same as the winning probability of the transition lottery (step S4108) carried out in each of the above games, or may have a different (higher) winning probability. .

More specifically regarding step S4116, it is determined whether the transition lottery restriction counter is 1 or more, and if it is 1 or more, a process of executing one transition lottery and subtracting 1 from the transition lottery restriction counter is performed. Execute. Then, if the transition lottery restriction counter after the subtraction is 1 or more, one more transition lottery is executed and a process of subtracting 1 from the transition lottery restriction counter is executed, such that the transition lottery restriction counter is less than 1. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the transition lottery is repeated until the result is (0). Then, in step S4117, it is determined whether or not the player has won in any of the transition lottery executed in step S4116. If the winner has been selected, the process advances to step S4118. Note that the process may be configured to proceed to step S4118 at the time of winning in one of the transition lottery in step S4116. In step S4118, the CZ mode flag is cleared. Then, in step S4119, the AT mode winning flag is set, and in step S4120, a portent command that sets the number of games in the portent mode to 0 is output and set, and then the AT mode lottery process is ended. The processing in steps S4118 to S4120 is similar to the processing in steps S3210 to S3212 described above.

If it is determined in step S4117 that the AT mode has not been won, the process advances to step S4121, and it is determined whether the number of continuations of the CZ mode is 29 or more. If the number is 29 or more, the process proceeds to step S4118 for AT mode winning, and if it is less than 29, the process proceeds to normal processing in step S4102.

As described above, according to this embodiment, while utilizing a configuration in which the count of the number of CZ mode continuations itself is not limited in the restricted state, the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode fall lottery, which are subject to the restriction, are performed collectively later according to the number of times the restriction has been applied (the limited number of times). Even with this configuration, by allowing the counting of the number of CZ mode continuations in the restricted state, playability is guaranteed when the restricted state is reached during CZ mode, and it is possible to avoid going against the purpose of limiting the transition lottery and fall lottery in the restricted state.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment, the fall lottery is executed the number of times corresponding to the value of the fall lottery limit counter, and the transition lottery is executed the number of times corresponding to the value of the transfer lottery limit counter, but this modification In the example, the configuration is such that a fall lottery and a transfer lottery are performed with probabilities depending on the values of each counter. FIG. 104(a) shows the fall winning rate according to the value of the falling lottery restriction counter, and FIG. 104(b) shows the transition winning rate according to the value of the transition lottery restriction counter.

More specifically, in FIG. 104(a), the probability of winning the fall-off lottery is set so that the probability of winning varies depending on the value of the fall-off lottery restriction counter, and an example is shown in which when the fall-off lottery counter is 1, there is a 50% chance of winning, when it is 2-3, there is a 5% chance of winning, when it is 4-8, there is a 1% chance of winning, when it is 9-15, there is a 0.1% chance of winning, and when it is 16 or more, there is a 0% chance of winning. In other words, the higher the value of the fall-off lottery restriction counter (the more times the fall-off lottery is restricted), the lower the chance of winning the fall-off lottery is set.

In addition, in FIG. 104(b), the winning probability of the transition lottery is set so that the probability of winning varies depending on the value of the transition lottery restriction counter, and if the transition lottery counter is 1, the winning probability of the transition lottery is set to be different depending on the value of the transition lottery limit counter. You will win with the winning probability (Figure 38) depending on the game result, if it is 2 to 3, you will win with 3%, if it is 4 to 8, you will win with 10%, and if it is 9 to 15, you will win with 3%. An example is shown in which 20% of the characters win, and if the number is 16 or more, 50% of the characters win. That is, it is set so that the larger the value of the transfer lottery restriction counter (the more times the transfer lottery is restricted), the higher the transfer winning rate becomes.

By doing this, the falling lottery and transition lottery will not be executed repeatedly, so it is possible to expect a significant reduction in processing load. This can be suitably compensated for by a post-fall lottery or a transition lottery.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, benefits are given to the player according to the values of the falling lottery restriction counter and the transfer lottery restriction counter. As an example of a benefit, a setting suggestion performance that can present information that can be beneficial to the player will be explained as an example. FIG. 104(c) shows the occurrence rate of setting suggestion effect A according to the value of the falling lottery restriction counter, and FIG. 104(d) shows the occurrence rate of setting suggestion effect B according to the value of the transition lottery restriction counter. It shows the rate. Setting suggestion performance A and setting suggestion performance B have different performance contents, and more specifically, they are performances that suggest different setting values. For example, setting suggestion effect A suggests that the setting value is an even number setting (2, 4, 6) or odd number setting (1, 3, 5), and setting suggestion effect B suggests that the setting value is an even number setting (2, 4, 6) or an odd number setting (1, 3, 5). This indicates that the value is less than the predetermined value (4) or greater than the predetermined value.

In Figure 104 (c), the occurrence rate of setting suggestion effect A is set so that it varies depending on the value of the fall lottery limit counter, and an example is shown in which it does not occur when the fall lottery counter is 0, occurs at 5% when it is 1-3, occurs at 1% when it is 4-8, occurs at 0.1% when it is 9-15, and occurs at 0% when it is 16 or more. In other words, the higher the value of the fall lottery limit counter (the more times the fall lottery is restricted), the lower the occurrence rate of setting suggestion effect A is set.

In addition, in FIG. 104(d), the occurrence rate of setting suggestion effect B is set so that the occurrence rate differs depending on the value of the transition lottery limit counter, and if the transition lottery counter is 0, it will not occur. If the number is 1 to 3, it will occur in 3%, if it is 4 to 8, it will occur in 10%, if it is 9 to 15, it will occur in 20%, and if it is 16 or more, it will occur in 20%. shows an example in which this occurs in 50% of cases. That is, it is set so that the larger the value of the transition lottery restriction counter (the more times the transition lottery is restricted), the higher the occurrence rate of setting suggestion performance B becomes.

By doing so, it is possible to suitably compensate for the player's opportunity loss due to being restricted in the restricted state by presenting information that may be beneficial to the player, such as setting suggestion effects.

Although the number of times the fall-out lottery is limited and the number of times the transition lottery is limited can basically be the same, the setting is set so that the more the number of setting suggestion effects A, the lower the occurrence rate, and the more the number of setting suggestion effects B, the higher the occurrence rate. Therefore, the length of the restricted state can be perceived from different perspectives, such as a player who wants the setting suggestion effect A to occur hoping for a short restricted state, and a player who wants the setting suggestion effect B to occur hoping for a long restricted state. On top of that, since it is assumed that the longer the restricted state, the higher the possibility of winning the AT mode, players can basically hope for a long one, while hoping for the setting suggestion effect A as compensation for when that is not the case (when it is short). In this way, the playability of the restricted state can be greatly improved.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the configuration of the AT mode transition lottery during the CZ mode and the CZ mode fall lottery is made different. That is, in each of the above embodiments, the AT mode transition lottery is made according to the lottery results of each game during the CZ mode, and when the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches 30, the AT mode transition lottery is won, and then the fall lottery is made when the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches 20 or more. In this modified example, this is changed, and a map table in which the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery and the winning probability of the CZ mode fall lottery are set for the number of continuations during the CZ mode are provided in the ROM 105, and the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode fall lottery are made based on the winning probability set in the map table in each game. In addition, a plurality of the above map tables are provided, and when the CZ mode is transitioned, for example, in the first specific role processing, a map table according to the game result that triggered the winning of the CZ mode transition lottery is selected.

Figure 105 shows an example of a map table. In the map table, the winning rate of AT mode transition and the winning rate of falling into CZ mode are set for each game according to the number of CZ mode continuations. For example, in map table 1, when the number of CZ mode continuations is 1 to 29, the winning rate of AT mode transition is set to 5%, indicating that the lottery for transition to AT mode is held with a winning probability of 5% for each game. Also, in map table 1, when the number of CZ mode continuations is 30, the winning rate of AT mode transition is 100%, and this map table also realizes the event in which the winning of AT mode is confirmed when CZ mode reaches the 30th game.

Furthermore, in map table 1, the CZ mode fall winning rate is set as 0% when the number of CZ mode continuations is 1 to 19, and up to the 19th game, the CZ mode falling lottery is held with a winning probability of 0% every game. This means that he will not fall until the 19th game. Further, when the number of CZ mode continuations is 20 to 30, the falling winning probability is set as 50%, indicating that from the 20th game onwards, a falling lottery will be held with a winning probability of 50% for each game.

In Map Table 2, the AT mode transition winning rate set when the number of CZ mode continuations is 1 to 29 is higher than that in Map Table 1, and the AT mode transition lottery is held with a 10% winning probability every game. In this respect, this map table is set as a more advantageous map table for players than the map table 1 described above.

In map table 3, the CZ mode falling winning rate is set as 0% for CZ mode continuations of 1 to 24, and the falling winning rate is set as 50% for 25 to 30. That is, map table 3 is set as a map table that is more advantageous for the player than map table 1 and map table 2, which are used up to the 19th game, in that the player does not fall until the 24th game. For example, if the trigger that triggered the transition to CZ mode is a strong cherry, map table 1 is likely to be selected, if it is a weak cherry, map table 2 is likely to be selected, and if the trigger is strong watermelon or weak watermelon, map table 1 is likely to be selected. It is preferable to select different map tables depending on the triggering role, such as ``3'' being more likely to be selected.

In map table 4, regardless of the number of CZ mode continuations from 1 to 30, the AT mode transition winning rate and CZ mode fall winning rate are each set as 0%, and regardless of the number of CZ mode continuations, AT mode transition is possible. It is a map table that does not win the lottery and does not win the falling lottery. Map table 4 corresponds to the above-mentioned restricted state. For example, if the restricted state occurs, such as when a bonus is won during CZ mode, the map table 4 will be used instead of the previous map table in the AT mode lottery process, for example. , map table 4 may be used to perform AT mode shift lottery and fall lottery for each game.

Even with a configuration using such a map table, when the number of continuations in CZ mode reaches 30, which corresponds to the ceiling, the AT mode shift lottery is won, and when the number of continuations in CZ mode is 20 or more, a falling lottery is performed. Furthermore, by utilizing the fact that the number of continuations of the CZ mode is allowed to be added even during the restricted state, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the above-mentioned ceiling is approached by the number of games during the restricted state. .

In addition, by using such a map table, the processing in the configuration in which the lottery for the transition lottery and the fall lottery is performed after the fact is simplified. In other words, if applied to the first and second embodiments, when returning from the restricted state, it is sufficient to simply return the map table to the previous map table, and if applied to the third embodiment, the CZ mode continuation number for which the transition lottery and the fall lottery were performed is temporarily stored, for example, 3 games to 13 games, by referring to the map table 4, which is the amount of the transition lottery and the fall lottery that are limited, and when performing a subsequent lottery, the transition lottery and the fall lottery corresponding to the temporarily stored continuation number are performed again in the original map table (for example, map table 1). In this way, it is possible to easily perform a subsequent lottery while diversifying the game by making the winning probability of the transition lottery and the fall lottery different for each game in the CZ mode.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the embodiments and modifications described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments and each modification, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments and each modification. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments and modified examples, or it is also possible to apply some or all of them in combination.

(1) In each of the above inventions, a configuration is used in which a transition to AT mode occurs depending on the number of games in CZ mode, and a configuration in which only the count of games in CZ mode advances in a bonus carryover state, etc., but, for example, The mode in which the transition occurs depending on the number of games is not limited to the AT mode, but may be the VB mode, the specialized zone, or another mode. In addition, it is sufficient that the player is given a benefit instead of a transition of the display mode; for example, it may be applied to a configuration in which a set value suggestion effect occurs when the number of games in a predetermined mode reaches a ceiling. It's okay.

(2) By changing the lottery table during the bonus carryover state, the stop control mode (number of sliding frames, etc.), the priority order in the case of duplicate winnings, etc., the bonus winning rate during the bonus carryover state can be varied. Good too. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the bonus carryover state causes the transition to the RT state in which the predetermined replay probability increases, and a configuration may be adopted in which the replay win is prioritized over the bonus win so that it is difficult to win the bonus, or the predetermined replay probability is increased. The lottery table may be changed to a lottery table that increases the probability of a payout result of , and a bonus win may be less likely to be achieved by prioritizing a payout result win over a bonus win. Furthermore, in the bonus carrying over state, the reel control may be configured to reduce the number of slips so that it is difficult for the reels to line up (slip easily) even if the stop operation is performed with the aim of winning a bonus.

(3) In a configuration in which the likelihood of a bonus winning is varied by providing replay results and payout results with a higher winning probability than before the bonus carryover state, the winning probability of these replay results and payout results may be varied depending on a set value. In this way, the winning rate during the bonus carryover state changes depending on the set value, and the AT mode winning rate when a bonus is won during CZ mode can differ depending on the set value.

(4) In each embodiment, when the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches the ceiling of 30 games or more, the AT mode is confirmed as having been won. In other words, during the CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the results of each game, and the AT mode transition lottery is also performed based on the number of continuations of the CZ mode. In the AT mode transition lottery based on the number of continuations of the CZ mode, when the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches 30 games or more, the AT mode is won with a 100% probability. In this case, the AT mode transition lottery based on the number of continuations of the CZ mode does not have to have a 100% probability of winning the AT mode when the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches 30 games or more, and may have a high probability of winning and some losses. In addition, the number of games that makes it easier to win is not limited to 30 games, but may be 20 games or 40 games, and the probability of winning may gradually increase after a certain number of games.

(5) Although the configuration is such that there is a transition from normal mode to CZ mode and from CZ mode to AT mode, the configuration may be such that there is a transition from normal mode to not only CZ mode but also AT mode. In other words, the transition route (lottery trigger) to AT mode is not limited to via CZ mode, and other transition routes may be set.

(6) The bonus state based on the first BB or second BB basically lasts for about 30 games, but it may also last for 20 games, which is less than the CZ mode ceiling (30 games), or it may last for 40 games, which is more than the ceiling.

Regarding the bonus state based on RB, it is assumed that about 10 games will continue, but it may be 5 games or 15 games. In addition, from the relationship with the 10 games (20th game to 30th game) in which the falling lottery is held, in order to avoid the falling lottery based on RB winnings, the number of games in which the falling lottery is held (10 games) It is preferable that the number of games above can be continued.

(8) Although a common lottery table is used for the bonus state based on the first BB or second BB and the bonus state based on the RB, separate lottery tables may be used.

(9) Separate lottery tables may be set for the limited bonus and the non-limited bonus. In this case, the limited bonus may be allowed to continue for as many games as possible in order to earn the number of games up to the ceiling of the CZ mode, and the non-limited bonus may be allowed to continue for a smaller number of games.

(10) If a bonus and CZ mode are won at the same time, the number of portent games may be changed depending on the type of bonus (restricted bonus or non-restricted bonus) and the number of consecutive games in the bonus state.

(11) The number of continuations during CZ mode may be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. In this case, it may be configured to count up from the start of CZ mode, or to count down the number of games until the ceiling (30).

(12) Regarding the falling lottery, the falling lottery is not performed when the transition trigger is won, but the falling lottery may also be configured so that the falling lottery is not performed when a strong cherry 2 or the like whose winning probability differs depending on the set value is won. In this case, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which neither the falling lottery nor the AT mode shift lottery is performed when the strong cherry 2 is won.

(13) If the drop-out lottery is won, the game is configured so that the AT mode transition lottery is not held. However, the AT mode transition lottery may be held even if the drop-out lottery is won, and if the transition lottery is won, transition to the AT mode is permitted.

(14) As the winning notification effect when RB is won in CZ mode, if RB and AT mode are won simultaneously, the AT mode first winning notification effect is generated regardless of the number of continuations in CZ mode, but this configuration may be applied to the first BB or second BB winning notification. For example, if the number of continuations for which the AT mode winning is confirmed in CZ mode is made longer than the above, or the number of continuations of the bonus state based on the first BB or second BB is made shorter than the above, the AT mode winning may not be confirmed depending on the timing of the first BB or second BB winning in CZ mode, and the first BB or second BB winning notification effect may not be generated during the first BB or second BB winning notification effect. In this case, if the first BB or second BB and the AT mode first winning notification effect is generated based on the simultaneous winning of the first BB or second BB and the AT mode, the winning trigger of the AT mode can be further complicated, and the unexpectedness of the AT mode winning can be increased, helping to increase the excitement at the time of the notification.

(15) The first win notification effect in the AT mode may be applied to the following configuration. In the normal mode, when the first BB or second BB is won, the CZ mode may be won simultaneously, and when the first BB or second BB and the CZ mode are won simultaneously during the normal mode, the first win notification effect in the AT mode is generated as the winning notification effect for the first BB or second BB. Even with this configuration, the CZ mode that is won simultaneously will reach 30 games during the bonus state based on the first BB or second BB, and the transition to the AT mode is confirmed, so even if the first win notification effect in the AT mode is generated, there will be no discrepancy with the subsequent game content.

(16) As a configuration in which a lottery for transition to AT mode based on the number of continuations in CZ mode is performed before a lottery for dropping out of CZ mode has been described, particularly for the first game after the end of a bonus, this may also be applied to a non-restricted bonus transition game or the first game after the transition. Also, although a lottery for transition to AT mode based on the number of continuations in CZ mode is performed before a lottery for dropping out of CZ mode has been performed, the order may be reversed, or the lottery may be performed simultaneously.

(17) The advantageous section may be defined as follows. A section in which push order notification corresponding to a winning amount related to the maximum number of payout coins occurs at least once. More specifically, at the push order bell where 9, 3, or 0 medals may be paid out depending on the stop order, push order notification that 9 medals will be paid out is generated at least once. An interval.

(18) In order to prevent differences in the probability or advantage of the transition lottery to AT mode, etc., and the additional lottery, depending on the setting value, these lotteries are configured to be performed based on lottery results with no particular setting differences. However, while the lottery is performed based on lottery results with setting differences, the benefits at the time of winning (benefits, probability of winning the transition lottery, number of additional games) may be adjusted to prevent setting differences. For example, a specific role is set with a 1 in 100 probability of winning in setting 1 and a 1 in 10 probability of winning in setting 6, and the winning probability of the additional lottery in AT mode when the specific role is won is set to 1 in 2 for setting 1 and 1 in 20 for setting 6. In this way, the total probability of winning the additional lottery is 1 in 200 for any setting value, eliminating setting differences.

(19) Although the above description has been focused on games in which the number of bets is three, the above invention may also be applied to a one-bet game in which the number of bets is one or a two-bet game in which the number of bets is two. For example, depending on whether the fixed RT state or the infinite RT state is in, a one-bet game or a two-bet game may be played (playable), but not played (unplayable) with other numbers of bets.

(20) The number of games that are forced to end in the advantageous zone is not limited to the above number (1,500) and may be more or less than that.

(21) The condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is not only the use of the upper limit number of games (1500), but also the upper limit number of payout medals (3000 pieces) in addition to or in place of it.

(22) The add-on lottery table and the add-on game number lottery table are not limited to those described above, and the winning probability and the range and average of the add-on game number when winning are also arbitrary. For example, the add-on game number may be a number of games that exceeds the upper limit of the advantageous zone (e.g., 2000 games).

(23) Although the VB mode as a pseudo bonus can be entered only during AT mode, it may be possible to enter from normal mode as well. In this case, if the lottery for entering VB mode is won, the winning game is set as the starting game, and the display of the interval indicator is started at a timing before operation of the game following the starting game is permitted. Also, in this case, if the first BB or second BB is won simultaneously with the VB mode, the game in which the first BB or second BB is won may be set as the starting game.

(24) Small roles with medal payouts such as Strong Cherry, Weak Cherry, Strong Watermelon, and Weak Watermelon are used as special winnings that trigger a lottery for transition to an advantageous section or an additional lottery, etc., and winnings with these strong cherries, etc. Although specific re-games with common aspects and combinations of these minor roles and specific re-games and bonuses have been described as examples, the results that trigger the lottery are not limited to these results. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined bonus is used alone or a lottery to move to an advantageous section is performed even in normal replay. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a transfer lottery or the like is performed based on the number of games played, the accumulated number of points separately given based on each result, or the like. In any case, it is sufficient as long as the trigger for the lottery to shift to the advantageous section does not cause a difference in the probability of winning or the frequency of occurrence depending on the set value.

(25) Regarding advantageous sections, the winning probability of the transfer lottery and the benefits at the time of winning (transfer mode, number of additional games, etc.) are the same regardless of the setting value, but the winning probability etc. is different depending on the setting value. Good too. In this case, depending on the type of result that triggers a lottery, such as a transition lottery, there are cases where there is a difference in the probability and benefits upon winning depending on the set value, and there are cases where there is no difference in the probability or benefits upon winning depending on the set value. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

(26) The number of games continued during the favorable zone is managed by the favorable zone game number AG, etc., but it may be configured to manage the number of sets by setting a period until a predetermined number of games is played (e.g., 50 games) or until a predetermined ending condition is met (e.g., until three consecutive replay wins). Specifically, the AT mode is configured to have a predetermined number of games (50 games) as one set, and the number of sets is determined by lottery when the AT mode starts or when the AT mode transition lottery is held. The AT mode is then ended when the determined number of sets is played. In this case, when a specific condition is met during the AT mode, such as the winning of a specific role, a lottery for adding the number of sets is held as an additional lottery for the AT mode, and when the lottery is won, the number of sets is added according to the winning content.

(27) When winning the push order bell or push order replay, the winning combination will differ depending on the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the benefits given will differ, and the stop order will be announced. Although the configuration is such that the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on whether or not the game is stopped, it may be any combination that uses a combination in which the degree of advantage for the player differs by notifying the player of the stop operation.

For example, on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel, the first symbol (for example, "Black BAR" symbol) and the second symbol (for example, "Red 7" symbol) cannot be aimed at at the same time (at least 5 symbols apart). )Deploy. Then, the first symbol on the left reel 32L, a predetermined symbol on the middle reel 32M (for example, a "first replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol), and a predetermined symbol on the right reel 32R (for example, a "first replay" symbol or The first result winning is established when the "Second Replay" symbol) stops on the active line, and the second symbol on the left reel 32L and the predetermined symbol on the middle reel 32M (for example, the "First Replay" symbol or " The second result winning is established when the "Second Replay" symbol) and a predetermined symbol on the right reel 32R (for example, the "First Replay" symbol or the "Second Replay" symbol) stop on the active line. The winning mode for the first result and the second result is set. In this case, if you perform the stop operation aiming at the 1st symbol when winning the 1st result, the 1st result winning can be achieved, but if you aim at the 2nd symbol instead of the 1st symbol and perform the stop operation, the 1st result winning will not be possible. It is not established and the corresponding benefit will not be granted. Similarly, if you aim at the second symbol when you win the second result, you can win the second result, but if you aim at the first symbol instead of the second symbol, the second result will not be won. It is not established and the corresponding benefit will not be granted. Then, we set up a specific combination in which either the first result or the second result is won, and when the specific combination is won, it is determined whether the first result or the second result has been won (the first symbol and the second result). Which of the two symbols should be aimed at to stop the left reel 32L) can be notified. Even in such a configuration, the notification makes it possible to win a winning result (either the first result or the second result), and the degree of advantage for the player changes depending on the presence or absence of the notification. Then, at least one of a mode in which such notification is more likely to be performed, a mode in which the probability of transition to the mode in which such notification is more likely to be performed is high, or a mode in which a person who has won a lottery for transition to these modes but has not yet transitioned. The advantageous section may be defined as a situation including the above modes, or the advantageous section may be a situation including at least one of the above modes, including each mode based on the pressing order.

In other words, the stopping operation to make the stopping result different even for the same winning combination is not limited to the stopping order, but may be any stopping operation mode including the stopping operation timing, and there is no need to notify the stop operation mode to perform such a stopping operation mode. is not limited to the press order notification, but may be any mode notification related to the operation mode.

Furthermore, in the case where a win occurs with a specified index value IV, multiple winning roles are set, and the winning role is varied depending on the stop operation mode such as the stop order and the timing of the stop operation. However, it may be possible to do the following. That is, if a win occurs with a specific index value IV, a specific role is won, and the stop operation mode corresponding to the specific role is then determined by lottery, and if the player's stop operation mode matches the lottery result of the stop operation mode, the specific role is won, and if the player's stop operation mode does not match the lottery result of the stop operation mode, the specific role is not won, or a role different from the specific role is won. In this way, the lottery for the game result and the lottery for the stop operation mode may be performed separately (two-stage lottery).

(28) The push order notification may also be performed in CZ mode and premonition mode. More specifically, when a specific game state is entered as a favorable zone, including AT mode, CZ mode, premonition mode, etc., the favorable zone may not end until the push order notification is generated at least a predetermined number of times (once).

(29) The ball output rate changes depending on each setting value, with setting 1 having the lowest ball output rate and setting 6 having the highest ball output rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease in the amount changes. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the ball payout rates for some setting values are the same and the ball payout rates for other setting values are different, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate. Further, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high rate of increase/decrease in the number of balls put out, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low rate of increase/decrease in the number of balls put out. In addition, settings 1 and 5 increase the number of balls in a short period of time and decrease the number of balls in a long period of time, while settings 2, 3, and 4 take a longer time to increase the number of balls than in settings 1 and 5. It takes a shorter time than settings 1 and 5 to reduce the predetermined amount, and setting 6 may have a configuration in which almost no increase or decrease in the number of balls produced occurs. In these cases, the ball payout rate for each set value may be the same.

(30) Although a slot machine has been described that includes three reels and three stop switches corresponding to the reels in parallel, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, a slot machine including five reels and stop switches corresponding to the reels in parallel. It may also be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operations in stopping the reels, it is sufficient to have at least two reels and stop switches corresponding thereto. Furthermore, although a slot machine has been described in which the active line is set to 1 line when the number of bets is 3, the present invention is not limited to this configuration; for example, the active line may be 5 lines.

(31) Although a specific example of a slot machine 10 has been shown, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine. In other words, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions of a slot machine, the present invention may be a gaming machine that has a ball insertion and ball payout function like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel gaming machine). If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only balls as gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as gaming value, and restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

For example, if a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls is configured to have multiple levels of setting values that change the ball payout rate, etc., each of the above inventions may be applied to suggest and teach these setting values. good. In this case, in a pachinko machine that has a high probability state and a low probability state in which the jackpot probability is high or low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high probability state, and the ball enters the predetermined entry section. In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state where the ball rate varies, the above inventions may be applied by setting the advantageous section of the slot machine 10 to the high ball entry state.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating effects, etc., as necessary. Note that in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but are not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

The inventions shown in each feature group below are as follows: ``Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines.In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions. There is a known configuration in which a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.Specifically, in the case of a slot machine, when a start lever is operated in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. Then, an internal lottery is carried out, and the reels start rotating.If the stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating.Then, the reel stop result is determined by the internal lottery. If the game machine corresponds to the result of It is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A first specific process execution means (a function of executing the process of step S3104 by the main control device 101) capable of executing a first specific process of counting the number of games executed in a predetermined specific state (CZ mode);
a grasping means (a function of executing processing such as step S3107 by the main control device 101) capable of grasping that a result of the first specific processing by the first specific processing executing means is a specific result in which the number of games executed in the specific state is a predetermined specific number;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing the process of step S3110 by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus to a player based on the identification result grasped by the grasping means;
a second specific process execution means (a function of executing the process of step S3205 by the main control device 101) capable of executing a second specific process as a lottery process for determining whether or not to end the specific state in the game executed in the specific state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a special means (a function of executing processing such as step S3202 by the main control unit 101) that allows execution of the first specific process by the first specific process executing means, at least in the game up to the transition to the transition state, based on the game result of the game executed in the specific state being a transition result (bonus win) that enables transition to a predetermined transition state.

According to the above configuration, in a specific state in which a benefit is given based on the number of games played reaching a specific number, an end lottery is held for each game, and a specific Assuming that the gameplay is such as hoping to reach a certain number, if the result of the game in that particular state is a transition result that allows transition to the transition state, at least in the game until the transition to the transition state occurs, While counting the number of games in the specific state continues, execution of the ending lottery is restricted. By doing this, it is possible to expect a transition result in the gameplay that avoids the ending lottery winning in a specific state. Moreover, since the end lottery is restricted and the number of games counted is limited to at least the games up to the transition state, by delaying the transition to the transition state, you can avoid the end lottery and increase the number of games until the bonus is granted. It is possible to earn money. Therefore, the gameplay in a specific state can be dramatically enhanced, and the attention of the game can be suitably increased.

Feature A2. The special means allows the first specific processing execution means to execute the first specific processing even in each game in the transition state, while restricting the execution of the second specific processing by the second specific processing execution means. The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that it is possible to.

According to the above configuration, even during the transition state, it is possible to avoid the end lottery and earn the number of games until the bonus is awarded. By doing so, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning as a result of the transition during the specific state, and suitably increase expectations for winning as a result of the transition.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the number of games executed in the transition state can be greater than or equal to the specific number.

According to the above configuration, by transitioning to the transition state, the number of games counted by the first specific process execution means becomes equal to or exceeds the specific number, and it is confirmed that a bonus will be awarded. Therefore, regardless of the number of games required from winning the transition result to transitioning to the transition state, it is possible to confirm the awarding of a bonus, and the transition to the transition state can be performed quickly.

Feature A4. The gaming machine according to feature A2 or feature A3, wherein the number of games executed in the transition state may be less than the specific number.

According to the above configuration, even if the transition state is entered, it is not determined that the number of games counted by the first specific processing execution means will be greater than or equal to the specific number, and the time required from the transition result winning to the transition state is Benefits will be awarded depending on the number of games played. By doing this, if you win as a result of the transition during a specific state, you can realize the gameplay of how to prevent the transition to the transition state and earn the number of games until the bonus is granted, and increase the interest in the specific state. is dramatically increased.

Feature A5. As the transition result, a special transition result (first BB, second BB) that allows transition to a special transition state (BB state), and a predetermined transition that allows transition to a predetermined transition state (RB state) different from the special transition state. result (RB);
The number of games executed in the special transition state can be greater than or equal to the specific number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A4, wherein the number of games executed in the predetermined transition state can be less than the specific number.

According to the above configuration, by transitioning to a special transition state based on a special transition result, it is determined that the number of games counted by the first specific process execution means will be equal to or greater than the specific number, and a bonus will be awarded. On the other hand, even if a transition is made to a specific transition state based on a predetermined transition result, it is not determined that the number of games counted by the first specific process execution means will be equal to or greater than the specific number, and in this case, a bonus will be awarded according to the number of games required from winning the predetermined transition result to transitioning to the predetermined transition state. In this way, different gameplay characteristics are achieved depending on the type of transition result, and it is possible to increase interest in the type of transition result as well as the expectation of winning the transition result during the specific state, thereby increasing the excitement during the specific state.

Feature A6. The transfer result includes a first transfer result (e.g., special lip A overlap 1, 2, which is a non-restricted bonus) and a second transfer result different from the first transfer result (e.g., special lip AB overlap 1, 2, which is a restricted bonus),
The special means is:
in each game in the transition state to which the transition has been made based on the first transition result, execution of the first specific process by the first specific process execution means and execution of the second specific process by the second specific process execution means are permitted;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A5, characterized in that in each game in the transition state transitioned based on the second transition result, execution of the first specific process by the first specific process execution means is permitted, while execution of the second specific process by the second specific process execution means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, depending on the type of transition result, whether or not it is possible to earn the number of games until awarding of benefits while avoiding the end lottery even during the transition state differs. In other words, if it is the first transition result, the end lottery during the transition state cannot be avoided, so how to prolong the transition to the transition state is the key to the game, and if it is the second transition result, the end lottery during the transition state cannot be avoided. Since it is possible to earn the number of games until the bonus is awarded while avoiding the final lottery, for example, if the number of games in the transition state is taken into account, it is possible to realize a gameplay where the bonus is confirmed when the second transition result is won. be. In this way, depending on which transition result is won during a specific state, not only the advantage will be improved, but the gameplay will also be greatly different, and the expectations for the transition result will be suitably increased. be able to.

Feature A7. an award lottery capable of executing an award lottery for determining whether or not to award the privilege or a second privilege as a different benefit to a player by the privilege awarding means in each game in the transition state based on the first transition result; means (a function for executing the AT mode lottery process by the main controller 101);
If the lottery result by the grant lottery means is a result corresponding to granting the second benefit to the player, a second benefit granting means (main controller) capable of granting the second benefit to the player 101);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein in each game in the transition state based on the second transition result, execution of the award lottery by the award lottery means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, in the transition state based on the first transition result, the termination lottery may be executed, but the award lottery for awarding the second benefit may also be executed. On the other hand, in the transition state based on the second transition result, although the end lottery is not executed, the grant lottery is also not executed. By doing this, when it comes to the first transition result, even after transitioning to the transition state, you can expect to reach a certain number while bypassing the end lottery or win the grant lottery on the way, and when the second transition result comes. , After transitioning to a transition state, the transition state is continued as much as possible until a certain number is reached. This will make the game more interesting during the specific state.

Feature A8. The gaming machine according to Feature A6 or Feature A7, characterized in that the number of games that can be executed during the transition state based on the first transition result and the transition state based on the second transition result are the same or approximately the same.

According to the above configuration, depending on the type of transition result, execution of the end lottery during the transition state may not be restricted, but regardless of the transition result, the number of games that can be executed during the transition state is the same. It will be of a certain extent. In this case, it becomes difficult to judge from the number of games that can be executed during the transition state whether or not the execution of the ending lottery is restricted. In this way, by making it difficult to distinguish between the transition states based on both transition results, did they bypass the end lottery and reach the specific number, or did they reach the specific number because the execution of the end lottery was restricted in the first place? becomes difficult to understand, and by having the player play the game while predicting this before it reaches a certain number, it is possible to realize gameplay that gives the player a strong sense of excitement.

Note that "the same or approximately the same number of games" may also be expressed as "the same number of games." Furthermore, "the same or approximately the same number of games" does not only mean "the exact same number of games" but also includes "a different number of games," and the degree of difference may be such that it does not result in a difference in the degree of advantage for the player.

Feature A9: A transition notification means (a function of executing a lottery result response process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a transition notification (such as the stop results of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R) of the transition to the transition state is provided;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A6 to A8, characterized in that the manner of the transition notification by the transition notification means is common when transitioning to the transition state based on the first transition result and when transitioning to the transition state based on the second transition result.

According to the above configuration, it is difficult to determine from the transition notification whether the transition state is based on the first transition result or the second transition result. This increases the fun of the game by predicting whether the specific number was reached by circumventing the end lottery, or whether the execution of the end lottery was restricted in the first place and the specific number was reached.

Feature A10. The grasping means executes the first specifying process before the second specifying process is performed by the second specifying process execution means in the game that has transitioned to the transition state or the first game after the transition state has ended. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, characterized in that it is determined whether or not the result is the specific result.

According to the above configuration, it is determined that the number of games in the specific state has reached a specific number before the game that has transitioned to the transition state or the first game after the end of the transition state is a lottery to determine whether or not to end the specific state. Grasping takes place. By doing this, even if you go to the transition state or reach a certain number in the transition state, the end lottery will end before you know it (before the benefits are granted). Unreasonableness can be avoided.

Feature A11. When the transition result is a specific transition result, the transition to the transition state occurs based on the fulfillment of a predetermined transition condition (stop roll),
Even if it is the specific transition result, in a game where the transition condition is not satisfied, the transition to the transition state does not occur, and the specific transition result is carried over to the next game. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10.

According to the above configuration, in a game from when a specific transition result is obtained until a transition condition is satisfied and a transition to a transition state occurs, counting of the number of games in a specific state (first specific processing) is executed. , Since the execution of the termination lottery (second specific process) that ends the specific state is restricted, the key to getting closer to awarding benefits is how to prevent the transition to the transition state after the specific transition result is reached. . By doing so, it is possible to provide an innovative gaming experience in which the player plays the game while hoping that the transition condition will not be met after a specific transition result is reached.

Feature A12. The special means allows the first specific processing execution means to execute the first specific processing even in each game in the transition state, while restricting the execution of the second specific processing by the second specific processing execution means. It is possible to
comprising a notification means (a function of executing special notification processing by the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific notification that the game result is the specific transition result,
The notification means is configured to perform the transition state based on the specific transition result based on the current result of the first specific processing by the first specific processing execution unit, thereby causing the first specific processing execution unit to perform the first specific processing. 1. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein when the result of the specific process does not become the specific result, an instruction notification can be executed to instruct not to satisfy the transition condition.

According to the above configuration, if the number of games in the specific state during the transition state based on the specific transition result win does not reach the specific number, the specific condition can be prevented from being met, and the number of games until the transition to the transition state can be earned. In this way, it becomes easier to award a bonus based on the transition to the transition state.

In addition, by configuring the transition conditions so that their success or failure is determined based on the player's operation or through the involvement of the player's operation, active player participation is encouraged in the above configuration.

Feature A13. The gaming machine according to feature A11 or feature A12, wherein the specific shift result includes a plurality of results that differ in the ease with which the shift condition is satisfied.

According to the above configuration, the number of games required to transition to the transition state may vary depending on the ease with which the transition condition is satisfied. Therefore, the ease with which players can earn the number of games required to receive a bonus differs, and a novel gameplay experience is realized in which the player plays the game while hoping for a specific transition result in which the transition conditions are unlikely to be satisfied.

Feature A14. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing lottery for each game based on the operation of the start operation means;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a payout of a number of game media corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state (normal section) and a first specific game state (advantageous section) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the first specific game state in the normal game state (a function for executing an AT mode lottery process by the main control device 101);
A specific transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the first specific game state based on the lottery result by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the first specific game state;
A means for shifting the game state to an advantageous state based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being an advantageous result (first BB, second BB, RB) that shifts the game state to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (a function for executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101);
A reservation means (a function of executing a process of setting the advantageous result to a carryover state by the main control device 101) capable of reserving the advantageous result until the advantageous state is transitioned to when the lottery result by the lottery means is the advantageous result;
Equipped with
A second specific gaming state (CZ mode) is provided as a gaming state in which the probability of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is higher than that of the normal gaming state;
the specific state is the second specific gaming state,
the benefit provided by the benefit providing means is the first specific gaming state to which the specific transition means transitions,
the transition state is the advantageous state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A13, characterized in that the transition result is the advantageous result.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the rotation of the circling body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circling body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, a predetermined number of gaming media is paid out by the payout means. In this so-called slot machine, depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, a first result winning may be achieved or a second result winning may be achieved, and the degree of advantage can be varied depending on whether or not there is a mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Furthermore, if the lottery result obtained by the lottery means is favorable, there may be a transition to an advantageous state that is favorable to the player, and by linking the transition to the advantageous state with the mode notification, a gameplay in which a large amount of gaming media can be expected to be obtained is realized.

Based on this gameplay, a second specific game state is provided in which a transition to a first specific game state where the frequency of execution of mode notifications is further increased is more likely to occur, and a transition to the first specific game state occurs when the number of games in the second specific game state reaches a specific number. The second specific game state is also configured to have an end lottery called a second specific process. Then, if a favorable result is achieved during this second specific game state, the number of games in the second specific game state is allowed to be counted in the games up to the transition to the favorable state, but the end lottery by the second specific process is restricted, making it possible to earn the number of games before a transition to the first specific game state occurs. This dramatically increases the gameplay during the second specific game state, and can favorably increase the attention paid to the game.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main controller 101) that performs a lottery for each game based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a payout means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) capable of paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101) is provided.
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state (normal section) and a specific gaming state (advantageous section) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
a transition lottery means (a function for executing an AT mode lottery process by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific gaming state in the normal gaming state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means (the main controller 101 executes winning result corresponding processing) to transition to the specific gaming state; function) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a transition result (first BB, second BB, RB) that causes a transition to a payout state where the probability of a predetermined payout result being a target for payout of game media by the payout means is increased. a payout transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) capable of shifting the gaming state to the payout state;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transfer result, a reservation means (a function for executing a process of setting the transfer state to the carryover state by the main control device 101) capable of holding the transfer result until the transfer state is transferred to the payout state;
A payout terminating means for terminating the payout state based on the fact that the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the payout state reaches a predetermined specific number (the main controller 101 executes a termination determination process); function) and
During the payout state, a restriction means (a function for executing processing such as step S3202 by the main control device 101) for restricting execution of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means;
A specifying means (a function of executing a process of winning the AT mode based on the number of continuous CZ modes by the main control device 101) that makes it easier to shift to the specific gaming state as the number of executed games in the payout state increases;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out by a payout means if the rolled number corresponds to the lottery result, there are cases where a first result winning is achieved and a second result due to the stop operation mode of the stop operation means. There are cases where a winning result is achieved, and the degree of advantage can be varied depending on whether or not there is notification of the mode regarding the stop operation mode. Furthermore, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a transition result, it may shift to a payout state in which the probability of a predetermined payout result for which game media is paid out by the payout means is high, and the transition to the payout state and the mode notification may be changed. By interlocking, a gaming experience in which a large amount of gaming media can be expected to be obtained is realized.

Based on this kind of gameplay, the payout state is set so that the payout state ends when the number of game media paid out reaches a certain number, so that the advantage of the payout state does not become too high. has been done. In addition, with regard to the drawing for transition to a specific gaming state related to mode notification, the implementation is restricted during the payout state, and while allowing the interlocking of the gameplay by mode notification and the playability by the payout means, it is Efforts have been made to prevent the rate from skyrocketing.

On the other hand, since the payout state ends when the payout number reaches a specific number, it is advantageous for the player to reach that specific number with as few game media as possible, and if the number of game media used in each game and the number of payouts paid out are constant, it is advantageous for the player to have a smaller number of games played in the payout state. Also, from the perspective that the lottery for transitioning to a specific game state is limited in the payout state, it is preferable for the player to have a smaller number of games played in the payout state. However, with such a configuration, players will wish the payout state they have transitioned to would be shorter, and if the gameplay is designed to meet such needs, the gameplay may become monotonous.

In the above configuration, the payout state ends when the payout number reaches a specific number as described above, but the more games played in the payout state, the more likely it is to transition to the specific gaming state. This increases the expectation that the payout state will continue for a long time in relation to the specific gaming state, and optimally enhances playability during the payout state.

Feature B2. The payout means is capable of executing the payout of a number of game media corresponding to the payout result based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result (the first combination of BB and RB, the first minor combination), and the payout pattern combination corresponding to the payout result has stopped at the active position;
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, specific results (the second prize among BB and RB, the third prize among BB and RB, the second small prize to the 26th small prize) different from the payout result are provided,
the payout means is configured to, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specific result, and a specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific result has stopped at the valid position, payout a number of game media corresponding to the specific result that is smaller than the number of game media for the payout result; or, even if a specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific result has stopped at the valid position, not payout game media or not be the subject of payout;
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein in the payout state, the payout result and the specific result can be the lottery results drawn by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, when a specific result is reached in the payout state, the number of game media paid out is less than the payout result, or no payout is made, so the contribution to the specific number that is the condition for terminating the payout state is low. In other words, the more specific results are reached, the more games are required to reach the specific number. In this case, the number of games in which the execution of the lottery to transition to the specific game state is restricted increases, and the number of game media used in each game to reach the specific number also increases, so the number of game media paid out during the payout state minus the number used may be small. On the other hand, as described above, since it is easier to transition to the specific game state by the specification means, events that are undesirable to the player, such as restrictions on the lottery to transition or a decrease in the number of game media won, lead to events that are favorable to the player, such as transition to the specific game state, and an interesting gameplay can be realized in which the player's disappointment is used to increase his or her happiness.

Feature B3. Comprising a game media setting means (credit input switches 56 to 58) for setting the number of game media to be used for each game,
A special number (3) of game media is set by the game medium setting means to win the payout result in each game, and the special number of game media is set by the game medium setting means. The gaming machine according to feature B2, characterized in that it is possible to win the specific result in each game.

According to the above configuration, the number of gaming media used in the game resulting in a payout result and the number of gaming media used in the game resulting in a specific result are the same, and the effect of reducing the number of winnings in the payout state when a game resulting in a specific result occurs is prominent. In such a configuration, if a specific result can be won during the payout state, an undesirable event for the player, such as a reduction in the number of winnings, can be appropriately dealt with by an event such as a transition to a specific game state.

Feature B4. A gaming machine according to Feature B2 or Feature B3, characterized in that the predetermined identified result is a replay result.

According to the above configuration, the number of games required to reach the specific number is extended by a replay result during the payout state. Therefore, the excellent effect of feature B2 can be expected with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature B5. The predetermined payout result and the predetermined specific result are duplicate results that can be won in duplicate;
When each of the stop operation means is operated in a predetermined stop operation mode, a winning of the predetermined payout result is established, and each of the stop operation means is operated in a specific stop operation mode different from the predetermined stop operation mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B4, characterized in that, when operated, a winning of the predetermined specific result is established.

According to the above configuration, the payout result and the specific result are overlapping results that differ depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, and as described above, winning a specific result makes it easier to transition to a specific game state, so more effort is put into stopping each game in the payout state. This dramatically improves playability during the payout state.

Feature B6. the predetermined payout result that is the subject of the duplicate result is the first result;
The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the predetermined specific result that is the subject of the duplicate result is the second result.

According to the above configuration, the number of payouts in each game in the payout state can be made different by using the first result and the second result that are the targets of the mode notification. In this way, there is no need to set a new winning configuration for the payout state, and the configuration can be simplified.

Feature B7. If the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal gaming state is the transfer result, and the duplicate result is won in the payout state based on the transfer result, the mode notification by the mode notification means is performed at a first frequency. ,
In the case where the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific gaming state is the transfer result, if the duplicate result is won in the payout state based on the transfer result, the mode notification by the mode notification means is less frequent than the first frequency. The gaming machine according to feature B6, characterized in that the gaming machine is executed at a high second frequency.

According to the above configuration, even if the payout state is the same, the normal gaming state triggers the transition to a specific gaming state, and the specific gaming state becomes a state where you can expect to acquire gaming media. A state in which different effects can be expected depending on the situation can be realized in the same payout state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the gameplay with a relatively simple configuration without using a complicated configuration such as providing a payout state for each situation.

Feature B8. A first payout state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined payout result is a first probability, and a second payout state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined payout result is a second probability different from the first probability are set;
The gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B7, characterized in that the termination means terminates the first payout state based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the first payout state reaching the specific number, and terminates the second payout state based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the second payout state reaching the specific number.

According to the above configuration, in the first payout state and the second payout state, although the number of payouts that trigger the end is a specific number, the probabilities of a predetermined payout result are different. Therefore, the number of games executed until the end may be different between the first payout state and the second payout state. By applying such a configuration to feature B1, the ease of transition to a specific gaming state based on the number of games played will be different between the first payout state and the second payout state, and the same termination trigger will occur. Even the payout states have completely different characteristics in terms of ease of transition to a specific gaming state, and can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Feature B9. The payout state includes a target payout state (restricted bonus) in which execution of the transition lottery is restricted by the restriction means, and a non-target payout state (non-restricted bonus) in which execution of the transition lottery is not restricted by the restriction means. Target bonus) is set,
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means in the target payout state becomes the predetermined payout result is the same as the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means in the non-target payout state becomes the predetermined payout result. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8.

According to the above configuration, a target payout state in which the execution of the lottery for transition to a specific game state is restricted, and a non-target payout state in which the execution of the lottery is not restricted are set, so that players hoping to transition to a specific game state can be made to take a great interest in the types of payout states. Furthermore, because the probability of a payout result is the same in all payout states, it is difficult to determine which payout state it is from the occurrence rate of the payout result. In this way, a game is added that allows players to predict whether or not the execution of the lottery for transition to a specific game state is restricted in the payout state, and the game is diversified.

Feature B10. The termination means terminates the target payout state based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the target payout state reaching the specific number, and terminates the target payout state by the payout means in the non-target payout state. The gaming machine according to feature B9, characterized in that the non-target payout state is terminated based on the number of paid out game media reaching the specific number.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of feature B9, the payout upper limit is common, so the number of games played during these payout states can also be similar. Therefore, even if a transition to a specific game state occurs with the same number of games played, it is difficult to tell whether the transition to the specific game state occurred due to the number of games played after the transition lottery to the specific game state was restricted, or whether the transition to the specific game state occurred without restricting the transition lottery to the specific game state. In this way, it is possible to diversify the transition routes to the specific game state and increase the excitement of the game.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing lottery for each game based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state (normal section) and a specific game state (advantageous section) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state (a function for executing an AT mode lottery process by the main control device 101);
A specific transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state;
A transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101) capable of transitioning a game state to an advantageous state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a transition result (first BB, second BB, RB) that transitions the game state to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the effective position;
A reservation means (a function of executing a process of setting the result of the lottery by the main control device 101 to a carry-over state) capable of reserving the transition result until the transition to the advantageous state when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the transition result;
A destination determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S3305, step S3308, etc. by the display control device 81) capable of determining the lottery result of the transition lottery executed by the transition lottery means in a specific game after the end of the advantageous state in a game prior to the specific game;
A special notification execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3306, S3309, etc. by the display control device 81) capable of executing a special notification corresponding to the result of the determination by the destination determination means at least before the advantageous state ends;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out by a payout means if the rolled number corresponds to a lottery result, there are two cases in which a first result winning is established and a second result is achieved depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means. There are cases where a winning result is achieved, and the degree of advantage can be varied depending on whether or not there is notification of the manner of the stop operation. Furthermore, if the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a transition result, it may shift to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and by linking the transition to the advantageous state and the notification of the mode, the game feature can be expected to acquire a large amount of game media. is realized.

Moreover, in this type of gameplay, the result of the lottery to transition to a specific game state, which is executed in a specific game after the advantageous state ends, may be determined before the specific game, and a special notification corresponding to the determined result may be executed before the advantageous state ends. In this way, by building anticipation for the special notification to be executed in the advantageous state, the association between the advantageous state and the specific game state can be strengthened, and interest in the game can be increased.

Feature C2. a restriction means (a function for executing processing such as step S3202 by the main control device 101) for restricting execution of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means in the advantageous state;
a specific lottery means (a function for executing the process of step S3209 by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific lottery corresponding to the transition lottery restricted by the restriction means in the specific game;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the destination specifying means specifies the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means.

According to the above configuration, the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is restricted during an advantageous state, and a specific lottery corresponding to the transition lottery that is subject to the restriction is held in a specific game. Since the result of the specific lottery is carried out as a special notification during the advantageous state, even if the transfer lottery is not carried out in the advantageous state, it can be made to appear as if it were being carried out. By doing this, it is possible to suitably produce effects related to gameplay using advantageous states and special states, without increasing the advantage level during advantageous states too much, and without weakening interest in special states during advantageous states. can be done.

Feature C3. The lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, and a transition notification means (a function of executing a setting process of a bonus winning notification effect by the display control device 81) is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the special notification execution means is capable of executing the special notification when the transition notification is made by the transition notification means.

According to the above configuration, when a transition notification is made that the transition result is a win, the result of the transition lottery to be held in the specific game after the advantageous state based on the transition result is notified as a special notification. In this way, it is possible to know the situation regarding the specific game state after the advantageous state before the transition to the advantageous state, and it is possible to provide innovative notification content.

Feature C4. The transition lottery means is capable of executing the transition lottery based on the lottery result by the lottery means being the transition result,
A second special notification execution means that can execute a second special notification corresponding to the result of the transition lottery based on the transition result at least before the end of the advantageous state (processing such as step S3507 by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing (a function of executing).

According to the above configuration, the result of the transfer lottery based on the transfer result may be notified in a situation where the special notification execution means makes a special notification (before the advantageous state ends). By doing so, it is possible to make the special notification by the special notification execution means appear as if it were a notification corresponding to the result of the transfer lottery based on the transfer result. More specifically, even if the result of the transition lottery based on the transition result does not correspond to the transition to a specific gaming state, or even if the transition lottery itself is not held, the result of the transition lottery based on the transition result will be changed to the transition by special notification. This makes it possible to make people think that they are compatible. Therefore, it is possible to make the advantage (lottery probability) in the transition lottery based on the transition result seem higher than it actually is.

Feature C5. The gaming machine described in Feature C4, characterized in that the game in which the special notification can be executed by the special notification execution means and the game in which the second special notification can be executed by the second special notification execution means are the same.

The above configuration makes it possible to enhance the effect of making a special notification seem like a second special notification, or making a second special notification seem like a special notification.

Feature C6. A gaming machine according to Feature C4 or Feature C5, characterized in that the notification mode of the special notification by the special notification execution means when the result specified by the first specification means is a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state, and the notification mode of the second special notification by the second special notification execution means when the result of the transition lottery based on the transition result is a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state are the same.

The above configuration makes it possible to enhance the effect of making a special notification seem like a second special notification, or making a second special notification seem like a special notification.

Feature C7. comprising a grasping means for grasping the stop roll in the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means has become the transfer result (a function for executing the winning game winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101);
The special notification execution means is capable of executing the special notification by the special notification execution means at a first timing when the grasping result by the grasping means is a result of a first stop roll, If the grasping result is a second stop result different from the first stop result, the special notification by the special notification execution means can be executed at a second timing different from the first timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6.

According to the above configuration, the timing of the special notification may differ depending on the winning outcome of the game that results in a transition. In this way, the player can select the timing of the special notification by his or her own operation. For example, if the player can obtain some useful information (e.g., a guess at a setting value) from the timing of the special notification, this is expected to lead to more active participation in the game, and the enjoyment of the game will be improved.

Feature C8. The transition result includes a first transition result in which the execution of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means during the advantageous state is restricted, and a second transition result in which the execution of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means during the advantageous state is not restricted;
A stop result in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the first transition result may be the first stop result;
The gaming machine described in feature C7, wherein a stop outcome in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition outcome can become the second stop outcome.

According to the above configuration, if the stop roll in the game in which the transition result is a win is the first stop roll, it is understood that the subsequent execution of the transition lottery in an advantageous state is restricted, and the second stop roll is determined. If there is a winning result, it is understood that the subsequent execution of the transition lottery in an advantageous state is not restricted. In addition, it is possible to make the special notification corresponding to the result of the transition lottery executed in a specific game after the end of the advantageous state different between the first timing and the second timing, so that the special notification can be made in the advantageous state. The user can enjoy the special notification while knowing to some extent whether it corresponds to the result of the transition lottery in the middle or the result of the transition lottery executed in a specific game. Moreover, in this way, even if the result of a transition lottery conducted in a specific game after an advantageous state is simulated to be announced during an advantageous state, the pseudo This makes it possible to reduce the feeling of embarrassment caused by execution after realizing that it is spurious.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing lottery for each game based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result which results in a winning when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
As game states, at least a normal game state (normal section) and a specific game state (advantageous section) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided;
A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state (a function for executing an AT mode lottery process by the main control device 101);
A specific transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the transition lottery means being a result corresponding to transition to the specific game state;
A grasping means (a function of executing a process of grasping a transition lottery limit counter by the main control device 101) capable of grasping specific information corresponding to the number of times the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is limited or the number of games executed under the limited circumstances;
A specific lottery means (a function of executing the processes of step S3209, step S4016, etc. by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific award lottery to determine whether or not to award a specific benefit to a player based on the specific information grasped by the grasping means;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out by a payout means if the rolled number corresponds to a lottery result, there are two cases in which a first result winning is established and a second result is achieved depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means. There are cases where a winning result is achieved, and the degree of advantage can be varied depending on whether or not there is notification of the manner of the stop operation.

Although it becomes easier to perform mode notification when the game state is transferred to a specific gaming state through a transition lottery performed by the transition lottery means, the transition lottery may be restricted in some gaming machines. For example, this includes the bonus state and the carryover state of bonuses. By restricting the transfer lottery in these states, it is possible to suppress the increase in the payout rate, and, for example, to prevent bonus winnings from occurring. It is also possible to ensure fairness between players who are able to operate the game and those who are not.

However, if such a transition lottery is sometimes restricted, the player may feel as if the opportunity for a transition lottery has been exploited. Therefore, in the above configuration, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to grant a specific benefit based on specific information corresponding to the limited number of transfer lottery and the number of games played in a situation where the transfer lottery is restricted. This makes it difficult to give the impression that the user has been exploited as described above. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can meet the demands of players.

Feature D2. The grasping means is provided with a destination specifying means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3305 and S3308 by the display control device 81) capable of specifying the specific information before the transition lottery is restricted,
The gaming machine described in feature D1, wherein the specific lottery means is capable of executing the specific award lottery based on the specific information identified by the destination identification means.

According to the above configuration, before the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is limited, specific information corresponding to the limited number of times or number of games may be specified, and a lottery for granting a specific benefit may be held based on the specific information. In other words, before the transition lottery is limited, a lottery may be held based on the limited number of times, etc., realizing an innovative gameplay in which the limit for future transition lotteries is drawn in advance.

Feature D3. The gaming machine described in Feature D2 is characterized in that it is equipped with a special notification execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3306 and S3309 by the display control device 81) that can execute a special notification corresponding to the lottery result by the specific lottery means before the transition lottery is restricted.

According to the above configuration, a novel configuration is achieved in which not only the limited number of future transition lottery lots are drawn in advance, but also the preliminary lottery results are announced before the limit is reached. By doing this, it becomes difficult for players to recognize that there is a restriction, so while it is hoped that restricting transfer lottery will have the effect of ensuring the fairness of gaming, players will not be aware of the restriction. It becomes possible to play games without being particularly conscious of events that occur.

Feature D4. Execution lottery means (a function for executing a CZ mode fall lottery by the main controller 101) for performing an execution lottery to determine whether or not to execute the transition lottery by the transition lottery means;
A second grasping means capable of grasping second specific information corresponding to the number of times the execution lottery is limited by the execution lottery means or the number of games executed in the restricted situation (fall lottery restriction by the main controller 101) (a function that executes processing to understand counters),
a specific processing execution unit (a function for executing processing such as step S4013 by the main controller 101) capable of executing specific processing based on the second specific information grasped by the second grasping unit;
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized by comprising:

There are cases where the execution lottery for the transition lottery is restricted. In a configuration in which the execution lottery is also restricted when the transition lottery is restricted, if a specific award lottery is performed based only on the restricted number of transition lotteries, there is a possibility that the specific award lottery will be performed based on a number of times that includes those that were not actually performed. Therefore, in the above configuration, a specific process is performed based on the second specific information corresponding to the restricted number of times of the execution lottery. For example, if this specific process is reflected in the specific award lottery, it is possible to perform a lottery corresponding to the actual restricted number of transition lotteries. Therefore, it is possible to optimize the game while preventing the player's advantage from increasing too much and preventing the ball payout rate from increasing.

Feature D5. The specific process execution means executes the specific process of subtracting the number of times the transition lottery was not executed or the number of games executed in the non-execution situation from the number of times the transition lottery was limited by the transition lottery means or the number of games executed in the limited situation based on the second specific information grasped by the second grasping means,
The gaming machine described in feature D4, wherein the specific lottery means executes the specific award lottery based on information after the specific process is executed.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature D4 when a lottery is held excluding the amount determined not to be executed by the execution lottery.

Feature D6. The specific processing execution means executes a second specific award lottery for determining whether or not to award a second specific benefit (setting suggestion effect A) to the player based on the second specific information grasped by the second grasping means. The gaming machine according to feature D4 or feature D5 is capable of executing the following.

According to the above configuration, the second specific benefit may be awarded based on the limited number of execution lotteries. In this case, the fewer the limited number of execution lotteries, the more likely a transition lottery will be held, so a smaller limited number of execution lotteries is preferable for players who wish to obtain the specific benefit. Conversely, the more the limited number of execution lotteries, the less likely a transition lottery will be held, so a larger limited number of execution lotteries is preferable for players who wish to obtain the second specific benefit. In this way, by configuring the benefit to be awarded based on the limited number of execution lotteries and the limited number of transition lotteries, which are in a contradictory relationship, it is possible to make it seem preferable for either limit to be larger.

Feature D7: Equipped with a setting means (a function of executing a process for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) that sets a plurality of set values that can cause a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of the gaming media;
The specific benefit is to generate a first suggestion effect of which of the plurality of setting values is set,
The second specific benefit is to generate a second suggestion effect indicating which of the plurality of stages of setting values is set,
A gaming machine described in feature D6, characterized in that the range or content of the setting values suggested by the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are different.

According to the above configuration, the first suggestion effect occurs when a specific benefit is provided, and the second suggestion effect occurs when a second specific benefit is provided. These first suggestion and second suggestion are different in the suggested setting value range, and the ease of predicting the setting value from the suggestion may be different. In some cases, it may be possible to narrow down the setting values by combining effects. In other words, although players will be happy if either benefit is granted, it would be a problem if only one of the benefits were granted, and it is desired that both benefits be granted in a well-balanced manner. By doing so, it becomes possible to realize new gameplay using the number of times the execution lottery is limited and the number of times the transition lottery is limited.

Feature D8. The gaming machine described in any one of Features D1 to D7, wherein the specific lottery means executes the transition lottery as the specific benefit.

According to the above configuration, a new transition lottery is performed in accordance with the limited number of times of transition lottery. By doing this, the transition lottery is restricted, thereby increasing the effect of preventing the impression that the opportunity to execute the transition lottery is being exploited.

Feature D9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features D1 to D8, characterized in that the specific benefit can be awarded without going through the specific benefit award lottery if the specific information corresponds to the limited number of times the transition lottery has been drawn or the number of games played in the limited situation being equal to or greater than a specific number.

According to the above configuration, if the limit on the number of transition lotteries is equal to or greater than a specific number, the specific benefit is awarded without going through the specific benefit lottery. Therefore, for example, in a configuration in which the specific benefit lottery is repeatedly executed the limited number of times, it is possible to preferably avoid an event in which the processing load increases as the limit increases.

Note that it is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the respective configurations of other feature A groups to feature D groups to each of the configurations of feature A groups to feature D groups described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row as a final stop; A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.), and further includes a throwing device that is provided with a ball tray and performs a throwing process of taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a putting device that puts out game balls to the ball tray. A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown into the game machine.

10... slot machine as a gaming machine, 32... reels as a rotating body, 41... start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... stop switches as a stop operation means, 64... speaker constituting the auxiliary performance section, 65... auxiliary display section constituting the auxiliary performance section, 68... indication monitor, N8... eighth display segment as a section indicator, 81... display control device as a sub-control board, 101... main control device as a main control board, 102... CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means.

Claims (1)

means capable of updating specific information when a game is executed in a predetermined specific state;
means capable of granting a benefit to a player when the specific information becomes predetermined special information;
means capable of executing, in a game executed in the specific state, a process of determining whether to end the specific state and transition to a predetermined state ;
Equipped with
In the case where the game result of the game executed in the specific state is a special result that enables transition to a predetermined special state , the specific information in the game up to the transition to the special state is While updating is possible, the determination process is configured not to be executed,
comprising means capable of executing specific notification corresponding to the specific information,
In a game in which a game result of a game executed in the specific state becomes the special result and the determination process is not executed, the specific notification can be performed,
means for transitioning to the special state when a predetermined transition condition is met;
means for terminating the special state when a predetermined termination condition is met;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the determination process is not executed in a game after the transition condition is satisfied but before the end condition is satisfied.

Images